Home

User`s Manual - Oracle Documentation

1. Option Description Edges Set the color for the section edges when defining Section Cut Options Fill Set the fill color when defining Section Cut Options Geometry Highlight Option Description Vertex Set the color for vertices when highlighted during measurement and markup Face Set the color for faces when highlighted during measurement and markup Edge Set the color for edges when highlighted during measurement and markup Configuring Background With the Background options you can select a gradient or an image to display in the background From the Configuration tree expand 3D and then select Background The Background Gradient and Background Images options appear 183 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 3D FILES For the Background Gradient option Select either Plain Directional Gradient or Radial Gradient The background is previewed to the rights of the options For the Background Images option This feature adds a single or multiple background images to the workspace TASK 1 Click Add STEP RESULT The Background Image dialog appears 2 Click on the ellipses to the right of the Image File field to browse to the image file ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can only select bmp jpeg or imgfiles 3 From the Stretch Type list select whether to leave the image as is Stretch to fill Zoom to fit or Zoom to fill 4 From the Positio
2. Components Nets Bookmarks Navigate between the pages or files or views by clicking the appropriate link Bookmarks lead to various views of CAD files such as AutoCAD file Model Space the 3D model of a file and associated 2D engineering drafts If a plus sign appears to the left of a bookmark click it to expand and view the lower bookmark levels Ifa minus sign appears to the left of the bookmark click it to collapse the lower bookmark levels To go to a destination specified by a bookmark click the bookmark text or the page icon located to the left of the bookmark text Selecting Entities Selecting an entity or entities is often the first step to many of the operations that you perform with EDA files The following sections provide information on how to select entities from the workspace Navigation Panel and the Entity Search dialog To specify which types of entities you can or cannot select use the Entity Filter dialog See Filtering Entity Types for more information on the Entity Filter dialog Once an entity is selected you can zoom to it in the workspace and perform other operations with the EDA file 65 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES SELECTING ENTITIES From the Navigation Panel To select an entity from the Navigation Panel perform the following steps To select one entity click the component net associated pin or net node in the Navigation Pane To select multiple e
3. TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Note ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Note 2 2 Click a point on the document where you want to insert the note STEP RESULT Anew markup note entity is created and the Note editor appears Enter the text that you want in the Note editor 4 From the File menu select Note Information STEP RESULT The Note Information dialog appears To change the default font select Font and the type of font 6 Close the Note editor STEP RESULT The note symbol appears on the drawing and in the Markup Navi gation Tree 7 Right click outside the note area to complete the modification ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To edit a note double click on the note 251 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS NESTING MARKUP ENTITIES Nesting Markup Entities You can add a Note or Hyperlink markup entity as a nested child to other markup entites TASK 1 Add a markup entity to a file for example a Box entity 2 From the workspace or Markup Tree select the Box entity 3 From the Markup menu select Note or Hyperlink ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Note or Hyperlink RESULT In the Markup Tree the selected markup entity appears as a child of the Box parent entity 3D Specific Markups When marking up 3D files you can attach text or a note as well as create ma
4. Rendering The Rendering options let you modify the manner in which the model is rendered Changing these options affects the level of detailed displayed The Rendering options are Option Smooth Shading Back Face Removal Description Set by default Turning this option off renders curved surfaces of shaded models as a series of flat surfaces The level of detail is thus reduced but render speed is increased Only affects shaded models If selected instructs Auto Vue not to render the back faces of the model being displayed This increases the render speed but the model appears less realistic while in motion Only affects shaded models Tristrip Dynamic Rendering If selected enable disable tristripping of mesh data for display The Dynamic Rendering options let you select the rendering mode for a model in motion The options you can select are 179 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 3D FILES Menu Option Fast Frame Description Model spins or rotates at a fast rate The level of detail is reduced which enables faster rendering when the model is in motion Wire Frame Model is displayed as wire framed during rotation or spinning Flat Shading Smooth shading is not performed on curved surfaces while the model is in motion Wire Polygons Render the model in wire polygon mode while in motion Vertex Clou
5. RESULT The hyperlink is deleted Adding Signoff Entities The Signoff entity is an approval stamp containing information about the markup author date and time of creation You create a signoff entity when the Markup file is finalized NOTE If a markup is modified after a signoff is created the signoff disappears is rescinded from the workspace but remains in the Markup Navigation tree Double click on the signoff entity in the tree to view the signoff history the person who rescinded the signoff the creation date and the drop date TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Signoff ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Signoff 2 Click and drag to create a box on the drawing where you want the signoff STEP RESULT The Signoff dialog appears displaying details of the signoff 3 Click OK RESULT The signoff entity appears on the drawing and in the tree and displays the author creation date and approval date ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 214 Markups MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES Rescinding the Signoff You can rescind a signoff on a drawing TASK 1 In the Markup Navigation tree or in the workspace double click the signoff markup entity ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Signoff STEP RESULT The Signoff dialog appears 2 Click Rescind RESULT The signoff disappears from the
6. S ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 100 WORKING WITH EDA FILES MEASURING IN EDA FILES Measuring Distance Use the Distance option to measure the distance between two specific points TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure at INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure pI STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 2 Click the Distance tab 3 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring To select all snapping modes click All On To deselect all snapping modes click All Off See EDA Snapping Modes 4 Fromthe Measured Distance Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you want to measure the distance along a path select Cumulative Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point 6 Click another point on the drawing to define the end point ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you selected Cumulative continue clicking points along the path that you want to measure 7 Right click to complete the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To make another measurement click Reset STEP RESULT The points are joined by a line The measured distance Delta X Delta Y and the Manhattan Distance appear in the Measurement dialog 8 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Calibrating Distance Calibrate the distance measurement TASK 1 Measure distance between two poin
7. See also Working with Markup Entities 207 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS CONSOLIDATING MARKUP FILES Consolidating Markup Files The Consolidate option allows you to create a new Markup file that combines copies of selected layers of different Markup files During the review cycle consolidation simplifies document revisions by providing the author with one combined Markup file instead of several Markup files Note that the Consoli date option is only active when more than one Markup file is opened TASK 1 Open the Markup files that you want to consolidate 2 From the Markup menu select Consolidate STEP RESULT The Consolidate Markups dialog appears 3 Select the markup layers that you want to consolidate into one file To select multiple layers press the Shift or Control key while selecting ADDITIONALINFORMATION To select all the layers click Select All and to deselect all the layers click UnSelect All 4 Inthe Markup ID field enter an IDfor the new Markup file If you want to open the newly consolidated markup as the active markup select the Open as Active Markup check box 6 Click OK RESULT The consolidated Markup file is saved If you selected Open as Active Markup the consolidated markup opens and is set as the active markup Marking up 2D and 3D Files AutoVue provides a number of markup options that display the same behavior when marking up 2D or 3D files You can add marku
8. 117 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES MANIPULATING DISPLAY OF A 3D MODEL Menu Rotate Sub Menu Description Click and drag to rotate the model on all three axes then release the mouse button From the Autovue toolbar you can also click amp or right click in workspace and then select from the menu Spin Re Center Default View Camera Views All Selected Entity Click and drag the object in the direction you want the object to spin continuously then release mouse button To stop the object from spinning click once anywhere in the workspace The spin velocity is determined by the speed at which you drag the mouse From the Autovue toolbar you can also click Reposition the entire model back to the center of the Auto Vue workspace See Re Centering Only available when one or more model parts are selected The selected part or parts are considered as the central reference point by which the model is repositioned See Re Centering Select a model part or entity as a central reference point to reposition a model See Re Centering Displays view of the model when it is initially loaded You can also right click in the workspace and then select from the menu See 3D Views Displays different views of 3D models Isometric Top Bottom Front Back Left Right and View Points You can also right click in the workspace and then select fro
9. 7 00001 R1 RESC16 7 00001 ANI RESCAX 9 00001 __RN2 RESCAX 9 00001 RN3 RESCAX 9 00001 __AIN4 RESCAX 9 00001 J1 MOL 541 30 0001 1 SW_SNA 11 0001 2 5SW_SNA 49 0001 J2 USBAF 23 0001 DISPLAY1 7SEGSMD 23 0001 g gt Component Pins Name With A U5 1 false U5 2 false u5 3 false U5 4 false U5 5 false U5 6 false ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 20 AUTOVUE BASICS AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE Bookmarks Tab The Bookmarks tab lists links to specific views Draft views 2D plans 3D Views of an EDA design or pages or bookmarks structure that is saved in files such as PDF Bookmarks 3D Model Components Nets Bookmarks Navigate between the pages or files or views by clicking the appropriate link Bookmarks lead to various views of CAD files such as AutoCAD file Model Space the 3D model of a file and associated 2D engineering drafts If a plus sign appears to the left of a bookmark click it to expand and view the lower bookmark levels Ifa minus sign appears to the left of the bookmark click it to collapse the lower bookmark levels To go to a destination specified by a bookmark click the bookmark text or the page icon located to the left of the bookmark text Components Tab NOTE The Components tab displays only for the EDA pages of a drawing The Components tab lists comp
10. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Minimum Distance 2 STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears Click laud First Setto select the entities that you want to measure from Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you select Net you cannot select any other type of entity ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 248 Markups ADDING TEXT 10 11 12 Click the first set of entities on the drawing ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To clear the last set of entities you selected click Clear Set STEP RESULT The entities are highlighted Click tad Second Set to select the entities that you want to measure to Click the second set of entities on the drawing STEP RESULT The entities are highlighted in a different color From the Measured Min Distance list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance Select Zoom to Result if you want to zoom in on the measured value on the drawing Click Compute STEP RESULT The minimum distance from the first set of entities to the second set is highlighted by a line The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measure ment Delta X Delta Y and the Manhattan Distance appear in the Measure ment Entities dialog To move the value box click and drag it to anywhere on the drawing To resize the value box se
11. CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 2D FILES From the Configuration tree expand General and then select Measurement to display the options you need The available options are as follows Option Description Decimal Digits Lets you specify the number of decimal digits displayed for each measurement Enter a number from 1 to 18 Default File Units Lets you specify the units to use for drawings when the drawings do not contain units Measurement Units Lets you specify the default unit to use for measurements Configuring the Base Font for Archive and Text Files The Base Font option lets you define the font properties for archive text and spreadsheet files TASK 1 From the Category tree expand General and then select Base Font 2 Select a font from the Font list 3 Select a font size from the Size list 4 Select the Bold option Italic option or both optionsto change the font style ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can see a preview of the text in the Sample area 5 Click OK to apply the font change and close the Configuration dialog Configuring AutoVue for 2D Files You can configure background color snap and overlay extents settings for 2D files TASK 1 From the Options menu select Configure STEP RESULT The Configuration dialog appears 177 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 2D FILES Snap Settings 2 Select 2D
12. CONVERSION CONVERTING A FILE Technical Drawing Page Sizes ISO Paper Format A8 5 X 11 0 216 mm X 279 mm A4 285 mm X 198 mm B11 0 X 17 0 279 mm X 432 mm A3 396 mm X 273 mm C17 0 X 22 0 432 mm X 559 mm A2 570 mm X 396 mm D22 0 X 34 0 559 mm X 864 mm Al 817 mm X 570 mm E34 0 X 44 0 864 mm X 1118 mm A0 1165 mm X 817 mm Converting a File TASK From the File menu select Convert ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Input area varies according to the type of file For example a word processing file displays the file and format a raster file displays the file path name format and size and vector and database files display the size file type and dimensions STEP RESULT The Convert dialog appears In the Save As field enter the path and filename or click Browse to locate the directory where you want to save the converted file ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If writing on to an existing file the contents of the output file will be overwritten Specify the conversion options Click OK The file is converted and appears in the specified directory ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can convert several selected pages of a multi page file to a multi page TIFF 299 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL CONVERSION CHANGING THE PEN SETTINGS Changing the Pen Settings With AutoVue you can specify a thickness for each pen color when doing a conversion This option only applies to vector files TA
13. Front Back Left S MB Right e 5 GDNative Views H Default b BR Isometric g User Defined Views Models Views Bookmarks 109 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES BOOKMARKS TAB Bookmarks Tab The Bookmarks tab lists links to specific views Draft views 2D plans 3D Views of an EDA design or pages or bookmarks structure that is saved in files such as PDF Bookmarks A Design Z 3D Model Components Nets Bookmarks Navigate between the pages or files or views by clicking the appropriate link Bookmarks lead to various views of CAD files such as AutoCAD file Model Space the 3D model of a file and associated 2D engineering drafts If a plus sign appears to the left of a bookmark click it to expand and view the lower bookmark levels Ifa minus sign appears to the left of the bookmark click it to collapse the lower bookmark levels To go to a destination specified by a bookmark click the bookmark text or the page icon located to the left of the bookmark text Global Axes By default there is a three axis representation in the lower left corner of the workspace The X axis is red the Y axis is green and the Z axis is blue When transforming a model or defining a viewpoint all operations are applied with respect to these axes ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 110 WORKING WITH 3D FILES SELECTING MODEL PARTS Selecting Model Parts You can
14. STEP RESULT The color of all selected layers changes in the Color column ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 78 WORKING WITH EDA FILES LAYER SETS 4 Click Apply to save the changes STEP RESULT The display updates in the workspace based on the changes you made to the layer color You can now save your changes as a user defined layer set 6 Click Close to close the Layers dialog Sorting Logical Layers Layer Sets You can sort the list of logical layers in the Logical Layers section by name visi bility color or physical layer TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Layers STEP RESULT The Layers dialog opens 2 Ifthe Logical Layers section is not open click Expand 3 Click the column header of an attribute RESULT Layers are sorted according to the attribute header you click For example if you click the Color o column header the logical layers in the section are grouped according to their color NOTE To restore the original sort order click the Order column header A layer set is comprised of all the physical and logical layers in the drawing Layer sets differ in the attributes of the different layers for example z order visibility and color You can also define your own layer sets to control which layers you can view and print 79 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER M
15. AutoVue displays the markup page containing the entity If you selected a markup entity that is on another page of the Markup file the page containing that entity will be displayed 265 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP ENTITIES Selecting Markup Entities To select a markup entity click the markup entity s outer edge To select multiple entities press the Shift or Control key while selecting The markup entity or entities are selected You can also select the markup entities from the Markup Navigation Tree To select multiple entities press the Shift or Control key while selecting Moving a Markup Entity In the Markup Navigation Tree or in the workspace select the markup entity or entities that you want to move To select multiple entities press the Shift or Control key while selecting In the workspace click and drag the selected markup entity or entities to anywhere in the workspace Transforming Markup Entities NOTE This menu option is only available for 2D and EDA files AutoVue provides the option to rotate markup entities Rotating a selected Markup Entity This feature is only supported for the Text and Stamp markup entities TASK 1 From the workspace or the Markup Navigation Tree select the markup entity to rotate ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Itis not possible to select multiple markup entities to rotate 2 From the Markup menu select Object and then select Rotat
16. STEP RESULT The points are joined by an arc 7 Click again to complete the measurement STEP RESULT The measured line path arc measurement and unit appear ina value box entity on the current active markup layer and in the Measurement Entities dialog 8 To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles 9 You can click and drag the text box anywhere on the drawing ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To make another measurement click Reset 10 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Calibrating an Arc TASK 1 Measure an arc in the drawing 2 From the Arc tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Radius Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance 3 From the Units list select a unit of measurement to which you want to calibrate the distance 4 Click Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate to a value Click Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate by a factor 6 Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration results appear in the Arc tab 7 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog 229 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Creating a Stamp NOTE In previous releases of Auto Vue Stamp markup entities were called Intel listamp The Stamp markup entity lets you create a stamp that includes document and user information metadata pulled directly from the backend DMS ERP PLM UCM system NOTE T
17. AutoVue preserves the current zoom level For example when the Go To feature is selected from the Markup Navigation tree AutoVue highlights the markup entity in the workspace AutoVue navi gates to markup entity if on a different page and maintains the current zoom level Measuring in PDF Files When measuring vector based PDFs AutoVue allows you to snap to certain entities to take measurements You can snap to the end points or mid points of an entity AutoVue also allows you to snap to shapes closed entities for area measurements This option also applies when adding a Markup Measure entity to the PDF file ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 48 WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH PDF FILES Text Search NOTE For Angle and Arc entities only 3 point snapping is available See Measuring in 2D Files See Creating 2D Vector Markup Measure Entities You can perform a text search in vector based PDF files where the scanner performs Optical Character Recognition OCR AutoVue highlights the text search result in the workspace and maintains the current document zoom level If the text is very small AutoVue zooms in to the highlighted text If the text if outside the visible workspace area AutoVue scrolls pans to display the high lighted text See Searching Text Text Selection Copy You can select and copy text from a vector based PDF file where the scanner performs Optical Character Recognition OCR T
18. Components Nets Bookmarks Nets Tab NOTE The Nets tab displays only for EDA drawings The Nets tab lists nets and associated net nodes pins connected to a net The top portion of the tab lists all the nets of the drawing s currently displayed page The lower portion of the tab lists the associated net nodes for the selected nets All selected nets are highlighted on the drawing To select more than one net press the Shift or Control key while selecting Alternately in the Nets panel 63 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES NETs TAB you can click and drag in the Navigation Panel list to select multiple nets The Nodes on Net panel lists the associated nodes for the selected nets Customize Name Parti User LOGI D14 No proje D13 No proje D12 No proje D11 NO proie D10 NO proie DI NO proie DO NO proje CLRCNT NO l proje Nodes on Net Customize Net Pin Use Pads UNSPEC SMD50 aie a Clk4 OUT__ SMDSO ji Name R5 2 Components Nets Bookmarks ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 64 WORKING WITH EDA FILES BOOKMARKS TAB Bookmarks Tab The Bookmarks tab lists links to specific views Draft views 2D plans 3D Views of an EDA design or pages or bookmarks structure that is saved in files such as PDF Bookmarks Design Z 3D Model
19. For example if you zoomed in on a particular region of the file the zoomed portion of the file is converted Extent Refers to the entire extents of the file Selected The selected entity is converted Convert Pages The pages to be converted The available options are All convert all pages Current convert the current page Range convert the pages indicated in the range Size You can set the size and units pixels inches and millimeters of the output file With raster files the units are preset as pixels X indicates the number of horizontal pixels Y is the number of vertical pixels for the current active file contents At times AutoVue will preset X and Y to match the specifications of the selected conversion file format Other times X and Y will be available and may be changed according to your preferences Your selection here will not affect the current display but will affect the conversion file s resolution Scale Set the scale percentage of the converted page DPI You may set the dots per inch DPI for the converted page Converting a 3D Model TASK 1 From the File menu select Convert STEP RESULT The Convert dialog appears 2 Inthe Save As field enter the path and filename or click Browse to locate the directory where you want to convert the file to then enter a file name 297 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL CONVERSION PDF PDF X and Y 3 From the Convert
20. MODEL TREE Expanding Collapsing the Model Tree You can expand the Model Tree to display child entities of a selected node or nodes You can also configure the level you want to expand the Model Tree TASK 1 Click the Models tab 2 From the Model Tree select the node or nodes that you want to expand then right click and select Expand All Children ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one node press the Shift or Control key while selecting STEP RESULT The selected entities are highlighted The Model Tree expands displaying the child entities of the selected nodes 3 To collapse a node select the node then right click and select Collapse All Children STEP RESULT The Model Tree collapses the selected node RESULT The Model Tree collapses the selected node You can also expand a node by clicking To collapse a node click amp Viewing Missing XRef Notification Icon If the loaded drawing is missing XRefs the Missing XRef Notification icon appears in the Model Tree to the left of the missing XRef To view XRefs are missing do the following See also Displaying Details About Resources TASK 1 From the status bar click the Missing Resource icon X STEP RESULT The Properties dialog appears You can also view the missing XRef from the File menu and then selectingProperties 2 Click the Resource Information tab STEP RESULT Any missing XRefs appear in the External Referen
21. PMI Filter Filters the entities that have PMI information Option is enabled if Type is set to PMI or All PMI Type Specify the specific PMI attribute you want to search Option is disabled if PMI Filter is set to All Containing Text Specify a text string that you want to search AutoVue searches for a specified string in attribute names and attribute values Attribute Filters Specify attributes to search for in 3D model See Performing an Attribute based Search Attribute Filter dialog Name Specify the specific attribute you want to search Some of the available attributes Color Density Display_Mode Filepath Layer_ID Name Translucency Visibility NOTE The attributes vary depending on the file being viewed See Performing an Attribute based Search Any Value When selected Auto Vue searches for any value of the selected attribute The attribute value options are disabled If cleared specify the values for the selected attribute you want to search The attribute value options correspond to the selected attribute 153 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES ENTITY SEARCH Where Option Description Advanced Volume Specify the size of an entity the minimum and maximum 3D Search dimensions The dimensions of an entity boundary box tab must be between the specified dimensions to meet the search criteria Location S
22. The Print Properties dialog appears Configure the print properties Click OK to print STEP RESULT The Print Progress dialog appears It displays document name number of pages and printing status OK Canceled or Printing When the print job completes the dialog remains open and displays the print status of each job paas Printing documents W 2d Visio V2000 Visio_Samples Flowchart Audit Flo 1 1 W 2d Visio V2000 Visio_Samples Flowchart Auto ay 2 2 W 2d Visio V2000 Visio_Samples Flowchart Basic Flow WE W 2d Visio V2000 Visio_Samples Flowchart Cause an m F W 2d Visio v2000 isio_Samples Flowchart Datafiow 1 2 inting W 2d Visio V2000 Visio_Samples Flowchart Horizontal S W 2d Visio V2000 Visio_Samples Flowchart Hoshin Flo W 2d Visio V2000 Visio_Samples Flowchart IDEFO Dia SS ss Sai D pe wre T lt m Cancel Job To cancel a print job select a check box to the left of the file and click Cancel Job s ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Clicking the dialog close icon minimizes the Batch Pring dialog to the lower left corner of the AutoVue status bar To restore the Batch Print dialog click the Batch Print icon on the AutoVue status bar 295 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL Conversion Sometimes you need to convert a file to be able to use it with an application it was not c
23. U S GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs software databases and related documentation and technical data delivered to U S Government customers are com mercial computer software or commercial technical data pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency specific supplemental regulations As such the use duplication disclosure modification and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract and to the extent applicable by the terms of the Gov ernment contract the additional rights set forth in FAR 52 227 19 Commercial Computer Software License December 2007 Oracle USA Inc 500 Oracle Parkway Redwood City CA 94065 This software is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications including applications which may create a risk of personal injury If you use this soft ware in dangerous applications then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail safe backup redundancy and other mea sures to ensure the safe use of this software Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software in dangerous applications This software and documentation may provide access to or information on content products and services from third parties Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not respons
24. You can also customize operations to suit your needs For example you can create and save your own views Define cross sections and cut throughs of 3D models There are also features like Bill of Material BOM and Product and Manufac turing Information PMI Filtering Models Tab and Model Tree The Models tab displays the Model Tree The tree displays the model s hierarchy inter relation of different parts assemblies and bodies The tree also indicates if a required external reference XRef is missing With the tree you can select different parts and modify their attributes such as color visibility render mode or transformation See Displaying XRefs for more information on XRefs ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 108 WORKING WITH 3D FILES Views TAB Views Tab NOTE The Models tab displays only for 3D drawings Models e M Page 1 i M SolidEdge_ilearn se z C a eer top a a oso boa cal gi J e 7 3D5oiidEdge stor Bh V 3DSolidEdge_go_ C H B 3DSolidEdge_arre C H B Y 3DSolidEdge_scre C DOoOoOoOWoOoooo OOoOoOoWgoOoooo w Models Vi The Views tab lists the defaults standard native and user defined views You can switch to a standard native or user defined view as well as add or delete user defined views NOTE The Views tab displays only for 3D drawings Views pe FP Default view n i camera views i Isometric Top Bottom
25. You can set the intensity or source position too high a setting tends to saturate the image and reduce its clarity Using the Directional lighting option you can adjust the position of the light source on an object You can make the following modifications via the Lighting dialog e Set the intensity and source position of the ambient light e Set the direction of light Add and remove a light source e Change light color brightness and specularity Setting Ambient Lighting TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visual Effects and then select Lighting STEP RESULT The Lighting dialog appears ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 122 WORKING WITH 3D FILES LIGHT SETTINGS Click and drag the Ambient Light sliding bar until you achieve the desired lighting STEP RESULT The lighting automatically changes with the movement of the sliding bar The Custom option is selected when you modify the ambient light To set the ambient lighting to its default setting select Default Click Close to close the Lighting dialog Setting Directional Lighting Setting the directional lighting adjusts the position of the light source on the model You can also add a new light source TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visual Effects and then select Lighting STEP RESULT The Lighting dialog appears To change the direction of the light click and drag the small ball until you achieve the desired lighting
26. by a factor 6 Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration result appears in the Measurement dialog 7 Click Close to close the Distance tab Measuring an Angle Use the Angle option to measure the precise angle between points on a drawing TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Angle ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Angle STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 Click the Angle tab 3 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring STEP RESULT Entities of the selected types are highlighted on the model 4 To measure the angle between an entity type and a plane select the With Plane check box and then select the plane from the list 5 From the Measured Angle Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle 6 Click two points on the model to define the angle If you selected a Plane click the vertex edge or face whose angle you want to measure between the plane ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To take another measurement click Reset STEP RESULT Angle arms appears indicating the angle The measurement appears in theMeasurement dialog 8 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 258 MARKUPS 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Measuring an Arc Use the Arc option to measure the precise radius length and angles of any arc on the model It also
27. er ONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure pm STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 2 Click the Angle tab 3 From the Angle Definition section select one of the following From 3 Points Measure the angle between three points Between 2 Lines Measure the angle between two non parallel lines 4 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring To select all snapping modes click All On To deselect all snapping modes click All Off See EDA Snapping Modes 5 Select Between 2 Lines if you want to measure the angle between two lines 6 From the Measured Angle Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle 7 Ifyou selected From 3 Points click three points to define the angle ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 104 WORKING WITH EDA FILES MEASURING IN EDA FILES 8 Ifyou selected Between 2 Lines click two lines to define the angle ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To take another measurement click Reset STEP RESULT Angle arms appear with an arc connecting them The angle measurement appears in the Measurement dialog 9 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Measuring an Arc Use the Arc option to define or select an arc in the drawing and measure its arc length start and end of angle sweep radius center and diameter TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure oo INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Me
28. lt issnsidinnnmmiicmaminbnnceuiemennnaiiacantonunanmianwaneautias 236 PSS S UNINC PG since cc ecovan tayacyasccncensehagaeedieaetussldccunnc cle benriedteckaasavsAensersai seaueubbuersteabanuteeetaueaneeaatpranctabeseny 237 Measuring aN ENGI N E Gove denial ase teense EENS 238 Measuring aNAl Cesc sascd ceculs ccs 5 vdeceus dovece pte iedesnuca cous swadeecausdosecensidecdeatelscocunced cee deenens eu See daaa eee 239 Calli ratiniG an ANG 2c sss wensicetes adie diieivn aansasnaa ened ania aa a a 240 Creating EDA Markup Measure Entities cccsssssssssssessssssessncssssssssscssscseesnscaccssssscsssssesnseacsnsencensenses 240 EDA Snapping Modes sscccsciesyes ccoyieissvstaccvissnspesesanpasawicsnciaes nats AT A AE EAA EA 241 Me suring DISTANCE ennn Ra EAEEREN E Ss 242 Measuring Cumulative Distance essssssssessseessssssssseeseeessessnssssssteseessosssssseosteessrssssssesstessessnsssesseeeses 243 Calibrating Distance saaien E R A AEE AENA SNS 244 Me suring Afe arssinat ariii iai as a i Ta E iaei ee 245 Measuring aN Angle os sis cs svasesieg cotsncczcasa a ninien n ni e ET A E E E aE 246 Meas ring aN PTC canes tice ee NN Nie ae Ds siaaa e Ne eee 247 GS UUTIAT VEIN VEDA VAI Goss cesesccacncazssev asvodysssosnetvss dunes eseaedevsevnconsctal iacnestcoucsiatceusteaitansenue SE S TNE s 248 Measuring Minimum DIStaNCe scscsscescscsscscscsscsscssssessseesssscasencsecnsseesssscsseacsucassucassnsasesssecssenees 248 1o Lo ATS KILES EOE
29. right click the Markup file then select Hide To undo the hide option right click the file name again and select Show Grouping and Ungrouping Markup Entities When you group markup entities you can move delete copy and paste trans form or perform any modification on the group of entities that you would on a single markup entity NOTE You can only group markup entities created on the same page Grouping Markup Entities TASK 1 In the Markup Navigation Tree or from the workspace select the markup entities that you want to group ADDITIONAL INFORMATION When selecting markup entities in Markup mode press Ctrl and drag the box to select all the markup entities within the area From the Markupmenu select Object and then select Group ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click the selected markup entities and then select Group STEP RESULT The group of entities appear in the tree under Group Perform any modifications RESULT The modifications are applied to all the entities in the group ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 268 Markups FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES Ungrouping Markup Entities TASK 1 Inthe Markup Navigation Tree or the workspace select the group that you want to ungroup 2 From the Markupmenu select Object and then select UnGroup RESULT The group of entities appear on the markup as individual entities Deleting Markup Entities TASK 1 Se
30. the Results list STEP RESULT The description appears in the Description field The description includes information such as the type of violation the location where it occurs x and y coordinates the component or entity it affects and the actual value measured When you select a violation result AutoVue zooms to the entity or set of enti ties that were affected and highlights them on the drawing 9 Continue to select violation results to view its description ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to restart a new check 10 Click Close to close the Verify Design dialog Exporting the Design Verification Results You can export the design verification results into a text file TASK 1 Verify the design 2 Inthe Verify Design dialog click Export STEP RESULT The Export Results dialog appears Navigate and select the directory where you want to export the results 4 Enter a file name Click Save STEP RESULT AutoVue saves the design verification results in a txt text ora csv Comma Separated Values file listing each violation result and its descrip tion 6 Click Close to close the Verify Design dialog 95 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES SEARCHING USING ENTITY SEARCH Searching Using Entity Search You can search for an entity in a schematic drawing or a PCB design using the Entity Search option To filter entities apply attribute or entity type filters as search criteria Y
31. weld specifications and surface finishes This information is based upon key design features which are specified through datum targets measurement points reference geometry for example construction lines surfaces and objects or the geometry inherent in the object The following terms can be used interchangeably with the term PMI Datums Cosmetics Dimensioning Cosmetics Geometric Tolerances GTOLs Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerance GDT or GD amp T Functional Tolerance Annotation FTA or FTA amp A 133 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES PMI ENTITIES PMI Filtering Use PMI Filtering to select which types of product and manufacturing informa tion to display TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select PMI Filtering ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click PMI Filtering Px STEP RESULT The PMI Filtering dialog appears and displays all PMI types 2 Inthe Tree column select the check box beside the items that you want to display in the Model Tree 3 Inthe View column select the check box beside the items that you want to display on the 3D model 4 Deselect the check box beside the items that you want to hide ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click All to show all items or click None to hide all items 5 Click OK to close the PMI Filtering dialog RESULT Only items selected in the Tree column are displayed i
32. 11 To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement 12 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog 259 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Calibrating an Arc TASK 1 2 Measure an arc in the drawing From the Arc tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Radius Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance From the Units list select a unit of measurement to which you want to calibrate the distance Click Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate to a value Click Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate by a factor Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration results appear in the Arc tab Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Measuring Minimum Distance With theMinimum Distanceoption you can measure the minimum distance between model parts as well as any two points from the selection sets vertices edges mid edges arc axes arc centers faces or any combination of entity types TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity Measurement and then select Minimum Distance ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Minimum Distance STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears Click M Set 1 From the Snapping Mode section select one of the following Select Entity if you want
33. 3 From the Line Color list select the color that you want for the entity ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Selecting Bylayer Z changes the markup entity color to the color of the layer 4 To define a custom line color from the Line Color list select Custom Color Y 5 From the Color dialog that appears select a color and click OK 6 Click OK to close the Line Color dialog RESULT The line color changes for the selected markup entity or entities NOTE Any new entities that you create will have the new line color Changing Line Style The current line style is highlighted in the Line Style option TASK 1 Select the markup entity or entities for which you want to change the line style 2 From the Markup menu select Format and then select Line Style Select the new line style from the options provided RESULT The line style changes for the selected markup entity or entities ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 270 Markups FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES NOTE From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click Line Style zs Alternatively right click the entity in the workspace or Markup Navigation Tree select Format and then select Line Style NOTE Any new entities that you create will have the new line style Changing Line Thickness The current line thickness is highlighted in the Line Thickness option TASK 1 Select the markup entity or entities for which you want to change the lin
34. 43 Analyzing 2D Vector Files sssssssssssssssesssssssssssessesseeseeseeseeseeseeseeeesereereereeeeerreererreeeeererereeresrrseessessessesesss 43 Comparing 2D Files saarnan onna i nA E E EA AE EAn 44 Drawing Information iatcmnudsciaciieianhaiswiuciienmenGdiniiaiainkdwadmnadanene 47 Working With PDE ENS 2s oc cessccucavaccedececsosyocsssncnsstoucvscscuedipecnussvatvdevtsodtoes Eoo ccusavaivotesatadeustca ance csasaTeundeies 48 Navigating Through Markups lt ccatucsialninnnl seme sorm noua bane Samana 48 Measuring inPDF FIGS ec scares cer ascidsscaetscotast ole Natetsna na EAA cen Soe TS 48 TE SCAN Cafe acetate ee el eee ata E asda dal Akal A gaia 49 Text Select Om CODY ssnin aina aia uondetheasui diet esa aer a E a a 49 Meas ring iN 2D File Sineeien annta aE EA SREE ET R SIS SRi 50 2D Vector Snapping Mod s seein ii E o EE asin ia ieaie 50 Distance In MONn VectOr File Sdernenin noia N A O e 51 Distance I Vector FHlESiriirero utaa es E Ea E E ee eTii E SEs 52 Calibrating Distance kann n a NARR N 53 Areain honNVector FilESsississnssuniossrunanniiisnsisiire iat besodact chvabensaenbusidhiessendteessacaae 53 Area in Vector FIGS iisscissccnessiszecsecdincsachcvsdestevbsnscalessalastecsnastecpsusca A arr i o iE a iaeo ar aia 54 A gl innon Vector Files ca unausaducs dnasnawhninsannmnndinadndudaunnnanoumowuee 55 POTEET VE CEOR EINES 35 cac eves E N OE A EE EEEE EATE 56 Arein MON VECLOU File Srusi a toes haath ear a tian 57 Arein Vector Files scare
35. 51 snapping modes 50 234 vector angle 56 arc 57 area 54 calibrating arc 58 106 165 229 240 248 260 vector files distance 52 non vector markup measure entities 224 text search 32 vector files 37 analyzing 43 comparing 44 displaying layers 38 displaying xrefs 39 manipulate 37 overlay 41 modify 41 remove 42 selecting blocks 39 vector markup measure entities 233 viewing options 33 pan and zoom window 36 selecting views 42 specifying a view point 43 working with 2D files 32 312 3D 3D views 125 advanced 3D search 157 bill of material 150 Bookmarks tab 21 65 110 comparing files 146 147 148 coverting 297 display attributes 119 color 121 transparency 121 visibility 120 entity properties 129 entity search 152 154 attribute based search 155 save results 158 explode 144 145 options 144 save 145 files 108 global axes 110 light setting 122 ambient 122 directional 123 new light source 123 properties 124 remove light source 125 manipulate mode 136 panning model 137 rotating model 137 scaling model 138 manipulating views 117 markup entities 252 markup measure entities create 253 markups 208 252 measuring 159 angle 164 arc 164 calibrating arc 58 106 165 229 240 248 260 calibrating distance 53 101 162 226 236 244 257 distance 161 edge length 166 face surface 167 minimum distance 163 312 snapping modes 159 254 vertex coordinates 166 mockups 116 delete 116 Model Tree 113 114 115
36. APPENDIX A EDA TERMS AND DEFINITIONS Fill zone EDA Term Definition A zone that defines an area to be filled with copper Fine pitch A class of surface mount components that is characterized by pins measuring 0 025 inches or less from pad center to pad center Footprint The physical description of a component It consists of three elements padstacks representing the pads of the component obstacles representing among other things the physical outline of the component silkscreens keepouts keepins and assembly drawing data and text documenting the footprint information for example the component name You may want each project to have its own footprint library containing all the footprints used in that project Ground plane A large area on the PCB usually an entire layer that provides a common ground connection for all component ground pins and other ground connections Heatsink A mechanical device made of a high thermal conductivity material that dissipates heat generated by a component or assembly Heuristics A method of routing that consists of repeated attempts to apply very simple routing patterns to unrouted connections in order to complete the routing quickly and cleanly Typically heuristics are used for memory and short point to point routing Hole The area where board material must be removed by drilling or milling Isolation The clearance around
37. Auto Vue toolbar Markup Properties toolbar and Markup Entity toolbar AutoVue Toolbar The AutoVue toolbar displays below the menu bar when you open AutoVue It is the default toolbar and includes the most commonly used functions when viewing a file open a file create a new markup print zoom and many others Depending on the file that is opened the toolbar buttons will change For example the following image shows the AutoVue toolbar when a 3D file is open a 2h eat DARA SD Qi 8 ses SB S es Markup Properties Toolbar me ie Untitled1 The Markup Properties toolbar displays below the AutoVue toolbar when you enter Markup mode It includes the available property and formatting options for the markup entities save markups change font fill type line style and many others The following image shows the default Markup Properties toolbar O lt gt z i 14 5 ee Se a s m B L U Arial 1 r 2 P B gt Markup Entity Toolbar The Markup Entity toolbar displays by default on the left side of the AutoVue window when you enter Markup mode It includes all the available markup entities for the opened file Depending on the file that is opened the toolbar ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 18 AUTOVUE BASICS AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE buttons will change For example the following image shows the Markup Entity toolbar when a 3D file is open R k l fe te 3 7 ODARA NOTE The
38. Change the line thickness for a selected markup entity or entities TASK 1 Select the markup entity for which you want to change the line thick ness To select multiple markup entities press the Shift or Control key while selecting 2 From the Line Thickness list select the required line thickness STEP RESULT The line thickness changes for the selected markup entity or enti ties Defining a Custom Line Thickness To define a custom line thickness take the following steps TASK 1 From the Line Thickness list select Customize 2 In the Width Pixels field enter the desired width 3 Click OK to close the Markup Entity Properties dialog RESULT The line thickness changes for the selected markup entity or entities 277 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES NOTE Any new markup entities that you create will have the new line thickness Width Pixels Customize the line thickness when Customize is selected in the Line Thickness list When other line thicknesses are selected this field displays its value in pixels but cannot be edited Arrow Style Add an arrow head at one or both ends of a markup line entity TASK 1 Select the markup line entity you want to change the arrow style To select multiple markup line entities press the Shift or Control key while selecting 2 From the Arrow Style list select the style of arrow that you want for
39. Document Pages NOTE This option is only available for AutoCAD drawings that have the limits defined Selected This option is grayed out by default To enable click Select and then select a print range The Selected option is now enabled Native settings from file This option only applies to Excel files When selected Auto Vue uses Excel s print settings that are saved in the excel document The following print settings are supported Page Orientation Scaling Paper Size Print Areas Page Breaks Row and Column headers Grid lines Left Right Top Bottom margins Force to Black Force all colors to grayscale Output a single page Limits output to a single page when the scaling options selected causes a single page to span over several pages NOTE This option is only enabled when Scale of Factor is selected in the Scaling section Skip Blank Pages This option omits blank pages when printing Print Notes When in Markup mode select this option to print the Note markups of the current file NOTE This option is only available when in Markup mode Print One Note Per Page When in Markup mode select this option to print one Note markup per page of the current file NOTE This option is only available when in Markup mode Print Row Headers Select this option to print row headers Option is only enabled for spreadsheets and archive files ORACLE AUTOVUE USER
40. Double click the measurement that you want to change the unit of measure or add a symbol to STEP RESULT The appropriate Measure dialog appears Deselect Display Unit check box if you want to hide the unit on the drawing It is selected by default From the Units list select the unit that you want to change the measurement to From the Symbol list select the symbol that you want to add to the measurement Click OK RESULT The unit of measure changes and the selected symbol is added to the measurement and appears in the workspace Using the Markup Entity Properties Dialog You can use the Markup Entity Properties dialog to modify markup entities TASK 1 Select the markup entity you want to modify To select multiple markup entities press the Shift or Control key while selecting 275 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES Line Color From the Markup menu select Format and then select Markup Entity Attributes ADDITIONAL NFORMATION You can also right click a markup entity in the Markup Navigation Tree or the workspace select Format and then select Markup Entity Attributes STEP RESULT The Markup Entity Properties dialog appears Change the line color the selected markup entity or entities TASK 1 Select the markup entity or entities for which you want to change the line color From the Line Color list select the color that you want for the e
41. E E T EN EE IE EE EES 249 Hiding the box surrounding the t Xt s ssss sessesessssssseeseesssssssssesseeessessnsssssseeseeososssssseesrerssssssssssse 250 RAGING K NOG AASE EEEE EEE 251 Nesting Markup Entities nsennnsaanonnnani r ena E n i E a aN 252 3D Spe ifi Markus sennoina a denne i NN ASNS 252 SVE KUP ENTITIES edio etn ees oenn e asea T a SEs aeea Te oor e as ae as 252 Creating 3D Markup Measure Entities ccsssssssescsscsecsessecsnccssssecsssssessnssscessssesuscsessnseaceasessceess 253 No le ele MEEDA Generar E E I A NA Sa E E A E S 262 Addig a NOUS e e dis E EAE nds E E E mw anemes 263 Nesting Markup Entities iss cassasarretostsachtesseneteranenneom sarc ehnen resonator a aatomeduwes 264 Working with Markup Entities cvessescsccsuscaavesesssvesvasocsssesicnssqevesvavctel via nvovsecvessdeasernsonoussuprvauatordionsssunnonaedereene 265 GO TO ai Markup Enti ty ccsscsettecsscssasescictsdercdscnsnsssctivdessacpaencar ch ensuahuelsasetbangeadeatsstielacnsenarsatianeaaidiae 265 Selecting Markup Entiti ES ss iicscasacscisessestscacaisscescanscsdeserseanssasdrnslaow eauacemednnindiudieanbaanes 266 Moving a Markup Entity ccacccscsescscccodccasecnscassccasscuscastanasciecGszcesstscoceesedcadcdtdsvenntn vtasacsedachdcasecaasbendealitons 266 Transforming Markup ERUUES cis sales ciiakeaniaunid inure mama 266 Rotating a selected Markup Entity caccacasccces ctatonscosssices teat occcdehascasarcuaceibhapeuadieaieelwaaeeacnacmeanies 266 Ch
42. EDA FILES NAVIGATION PANEL mation Components va Components RefDes Part Type Location U4 BOFPCE 29 0001 C1 CAPAE1 51 0001 C2 CAPC321 7 00001 C3 CAPC321 7 00001 C4 CAPC321 7 00001 U1 SOP63P 50 0001 U2 SOP63P 50 0001 SSOP50 _ 50 0001 SSOP5O 50 000 RESC16 7 0000 RESC16 7 00001 R2 RESC16 7 00001 R1 RESC16 7 00001 RN1 RESCAX 9 00001 RN2 RESCAX 9 00001 RN3 RESCAX 9 00001 RN4 RESCAX 9 00001 J1 MOL 541 30 0001 51 Sw _ SNA 11 0001 52 Sw SNA 49 0001 J2 USBAF 23 0001 DISPLAY1 7SEGSMD 29 0001 gm gt Component Pins Name Location with A U5 1 47 1500 false U5 2 47 1500 false U5 3 47 1500 false U5 4 47 1500 false U5 5 47 1500 false U5 6 47 1500 false Customizing Columns You can also use the Navigation Panel to select highlight single or multiple components or entities zoom to a component or entity and query entity infor In the Navigation Panel you can sort a column change column order or hide show a column To sort a column click the column heading TASK To change the column order or to show hide a column click Customize STEP RESULT The Customize Columns dialog appears 61 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES COMPONENTS TAB 2 Select the check box beside the column or columns you want to
43. Entity Properties Dialog ssssssssscssecssecnsessscsssessecsecssccssesseecssesseesseensesseesses 275 PAI VOWS E E A ASE SEE AE EE A EEE ETEEN 282 Print OptiOH Se a a arden aia Aa a T Ta eaa 282 Configuring the Print Options eessssssssssseeesssssssssesseecseesssssssssesseeessesnsssessteeseessnsssssseeereosesssssseesrersresssssesse 285 Print Margins ois coi esos ene aa lel endian eee a a e ae eiia iaiia niaii aai 285 Setting the MargihSansenunna nran R E A A sinis 286 Gale ty RO OCG I isini a a eea aiee aa eoni eE LeRoi Ea EE NEKE S Sa EE R i ai 287 Adding a Header and FOOLER eesssssssssssseeeseesssssssstecseesnsssssseeceeesssssnsssesseeeseeosssssesseeeeresrsssssseeereeonssss 288 Native Print Setting Sissener onaniar eissai eeo i aaaeei EaR E Rair rinne 288 Watermarks arn n a TA A A A A E O A RNR 289 Addi g a Watermark a ssssinutssiicssachscaniensinieranuindenioanutannomudabbimneunaunens 290 ASSIGNING PEM STINGS crs aci sciences arceechecscnsansesuiestccsatiecseetiepasieasaamsiaacsid edo eaa EEEE ARESE aak 291 Creating a New Pen Setting 4 ca c canes a ees oe Lhe SG atoll 292 Deleting a Pen SEttiNg ani enrian E EE SE ES EENS NEE SEES ESS 292 Partial Preview ofa Fienna a a a lana a EA eke alae todd 292 Previewing a File B fore PRINTING sessios estossi sra esT isses 293 Printing a all eprereee etter tren conte aren unr A A N RN ENAR S ROS 294 Bethy Prentiss assssssassevssesastcorioanrsnieteostcraneieatetionaoasennien neu nnia
44. Net Allows snapping to a net S Trace Allows snapping to a trace Measuring Distance Use the Distance option to measure the distance between two specific points TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Distance ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance mm STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 242 MARKUPS CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES 3 To select all snapping modes click All On To deselect all snapping modes click All Off 4 Fromthe Measured Distance Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point 6 Click another point on the drawing to define the end point STEP RESULT The points are joined by a line The measured line path appears as an entity on the current active markup Drag to move the measured line path 8 Click on the measured line path STEP RESULT The measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measured distance Delta X Delta Y and the Manhattan Distance appear in the Measurement Entities dialog 9 To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take ano
45. PCB Solder paste A pattern that serves as a template for solder paste application when the board is manufactured Solder side The PCB surface opposite the one on which most components are mounted component side Also the bottom layer of the board Test point A special point of access to an electrical circuit that is used for electrical testing purposes Through hole via A via that connects the surface layers on a PCB Trace Track The copper trails electrical connection between two or more points on the PCB and the onscreen representation of that copper Venting patterns Patterns etched in the board that allow gases formed during fabrication to escape Vertex A logical point at which a track is ended and restarted A vertex is located at each change of direction on the track Via feed through hole A hole connecting layers of a PCB A through hole via connects the surface layers of a board On multilayer boards a via not reaching a surface layer on one side is called a blind via and a via not reaching a surface layer on either side thus being externally invisible is called a buried via Viastack A numbered list of via descriptions Each description contains a via definition including layer style drill diameter size offset and solder mask guard width ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL APPENDIX A EDA TERMS AND DEFINITIONS EDA Term
46. Properties STEP RESULT The Properties dialog appears 2 To view the file properties click the File Properties tab STEP RESULT The File Properties tab displays the file name file size date last modified file type and number of pages the document contains 3 To view resource information click the Resource Information tab STEP RESULT All included resources are listed in the Resource Information tab If a resource that is required to fully display the file is missing it is listed with the Missing Resource icon 3 If a resource is found it appears with the Found Resource icon amp If a required resource is missing and AutoVue substitutes it with another resource the Substituted Resources icon s appears 4 To view native properties click the Native Properties tab Click OK to close the Properties dialog Navigating a Document with Multiple Pages AutoVue provides navigation buttons in the AutoVue toolbar to allow you to flip through a drawing for example Office 2D EDA or 3D files that contains multiple pages The navigation buttons appear by default The toolbar contains frequently used tools Previous Page Next Page p and Page Number Da You can also access the navigation buttons from the View menu by selecting Page and then the required navigation button 31 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL Working With 2D Files When working with vector and non vector 2D files in AutoVue you can instantly ch
47. RESULT The markups are saved To exit Markup mode from the Markup menu select Close All To view the 3D model s associated Markup files select Open from the Markup menu See Opening Markup Files for more information ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Note markup entities appear in the Markup Entity tree but not in the workspace To view the markups double click the Note entities in the Markup Entity tree STEP RESULT The markups open and the Note markup icon 3 appears in the workspace 171 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL Configuring AutoVue Use the configuration options to configure the Auto Vue workspace for different groups of file formats or for all files in general For example you can set different background colors for EDA 2D 3D or Office files You can also set paths to locate external resources such as fonts symbols XRefs or configure measurement options To access the configuration options from the Options menu select Configure The Configuration dialog appears To implement your changes and to close the Configuration dialog click OK ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 172 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE GENERAL OPTIONS General Options To access the General configuration options TASK 1 From the Options menu select Configure STEP RESULT The Configuration dialog appears Configuration x Category General Ref Paths CAD Font Paths W Text W Line Style Measurement Base Font W Dimension
48. Result select Subtract Select Clear to clear the Net Area Result field Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point on nw S Continue clicking points on the drawing to define the area you want to measure STEP RESULT Each point is joined by a line 9 Right click to complete the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To make another measurement click Reset STEP RESULT The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The area and perimeter measurements appear in the Measurement Entities dialog 10 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog 227 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Measuring an Angle Measuring an Arc Use the Angle option to measure the angle between points on a drawing TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Angle ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Angle STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears From the Measured Angle Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle Click points on the drawing to define the angle you want to measure The first click defines the starting point of the angle measurement The second click defines the vertex of the angle measurement The third click defines the endpoint of the angle measurement The points are joined
49. STEP RESULT The Configuration dialog appears 2 Select Desktop Office in the tree 3 Select a background color for each Desktop Office file type ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 192 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING BACKGROUND COLORS FOR DESKTOP OFFICE 193 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL Markups AutoVue has the ability to view many file formats and to create markups for all its readable file formats without the document s authoring application Marking up refers to drawing and writing on an electronic document When you create a markup for a file the markup is created on top of the original file Markups entities are saved in Markup files Ifa document has existing Markup files the Markup Indicator icon appears in the status bar at the bottom of the Auto Vue workspace Clicking the Markup Indicator opens the Markup Filesdialog and allows you to select the Markup files to display Markup Files Select Markup File s Name _ acad2006 002 J jacad2006 001 When you open a Markup file AutoVue layers the markup over the original file In Markup mode you can Create entities such as text arcs boxes circles clouds lines arrows and polygons Note that AutoVue exits markup creation mode after you create a markup entity In previous releases of AutoVue you were able to continue adding markups until you right click the workspace e Adda stamp or information to an entity by adding a tex
50. To access these options right click in any window and select an option from the ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 146 WORKING WITH 3D FILES COMPARING 3D FILES Comparing 3D Files pop up menu By default the Comparison Result window displays the unchanged deleted and added information NOTE The Compare feature performs a graphical comparison not a geometrical comparison In the Comparison Result window results are displayed in different colors to differentiate the results of the file comparison The comparison options and corresponding colors are Option Color Description View Additions Green Displays parts that are present in the newer file but not in the older file View Deletions Red Displays parts that are missing in the newer file but present in the older file View Unchanged Blue Indicates that there is no change between the newer file and older file The following steps describe how to compare files TASK 1 2 View the newer file From the Analysis menu select Compare STEP RESULT The Open dialog appears Enter the file name or browse to locate the file you want to compare with the newer file Click Open STEP RESULT AutoVue displays the Compare Tree and three windows The first window displays the newer file the second displays the older file and the third displays the comparison results To view the properties of a modified or moved entity in the newer fi
51. U Time Minute S Time Seconds r New line F Native Print Settings Excel NOTE A literal percentage mark is entered manually as You can also print system variables in headers and footers Select a variable from the Insert Variable list Some Insert Variable options are user name browser and java home 287 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL PRINTING HEADER FOOTER Adding a Header and Footer Native Print Settings In the Headers Footers tab you can manually enter text or choose from a list of Insert Codes to appear in the headers and footers You can also print system variables TASK 1 po o NA 11 12 From the File menu select Print ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Print STEP RESULT The Print Properties dialog appears Click the Headers Footers tab Click in the Left Center or Right field and enter the text that you want to appear in the header and footer or choose an Insert Code or Insert Variable To Insert Codein the header or footer click Left Center or Right then select a code from the list To Insert Variablein the header or footer click Left Center or Right then select a variable from the list To change the Font click Set Font The Font dialog appears From the Font list select the type of font From the Size list select the size of font To set the font Style click Bold or Italic or both then click OK In the Print Propert
52. Visibility Control Layers Select and display different layers of a drawing From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Z See Displaying Layers for more information Blocks Select and display a block from a drawing From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click ee See Selecting Blocks for more information XRefs Select the XRefs to display in the drawing See Displaying XRefs for more information Overlays Select an overlay to modify See Adding an Overlay for more information Displaying Layers Use this option to configure the layers to display of the current active file TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Layers STEP RESULT The Select the Layers to Display dialog appears listing the layers and layer visibility for the current active file 2 Tosort the list of layers in the dialog click Name to sort alphabetically or numerically or click Status to sort by visibility ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 38 WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES You can modify the visibility of a layer or layers by doing one of the following Deselect select the Status check box beside the layers that you want to hide display Click All On to display all the layers or click All Off to hide all the layers Select a layer from the d
53. WORKING WITH EDA FILES COMPARING A PCB WITH ARTWORK ties in any open view when cross probing the 2D view and 3D view of the same file 2 Right click and select Zoom Selected RESULT AutoVue zooms to the same entities in all the open file or views See also Configuring Zoom Behavior when Cross Probing for more informa tion Comparing a PCB with Artwork You can visually compare PCB designs with artwork In Compare mode for EDA files EDA options such as Select Entity Entity Search dialog and Entity Filter are available NOTE The Compare feature performs a graphical comparison not a geometrical comparison TASK 1 Open the PCB file that you want to compare with the artwork 2 From the Analysis menu select Compare STEP RESULT The Open dialog appears 3 Enter the file name or browse to locate the artwork file you want to compare with the PCB file 4 Click Open STEP RESULT The PCB Artwork Comparison dialog appears 5 From the box select the PCB Physical layer that represents the artwork ADDITIONAL INFORMATION For example TOP or BOTTOM 6 Click OK STEP RESULT AutoVue displays three windows the first displaying the original PCB drawing the second displaying the Artwork drawing and the third the Comparison Result window 87 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES GENERATING BILL OF MATERIAL BOM Generating 7 To exit Compare mode from the File menu select Exit
54. a hyperlink to a Web page URL then you must select A new browser window ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 212 MARKUPS MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES 7 Click OK 8 Right click to exit hyperlink creation mode RESULT The hyperlink appears on the Markup Opening a Hyperlink To open a hyperlink double click on it from the workspace The hyperlink file opens in the window you selected in the Establish Hyperlink dialog Editing a Hyperlink TASK 1 Inthe Markup Navigation Tree or from the workspace select the hyper link that you want to edit 2 From the Markup menu select Format and then select Edit Hyper link ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click the hyperlink and select Format and then select Edit Hyperlink STEP RESULT The Establish Hyperlink dialog appears Edit the information that you want 4 Click OK to close the Establish Hyperlink dialog RESULT The changes are saved Deleting a Hyperlink TASK 1 Inthe Markup Navigation Tree or from the workspace select the hyper link that you want to delete 213 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES 2 From the Markup menu select Format and then select Remove Hyperlink ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click the hyperlink and select Format and then select Remove Hyperlink You can also delete the hyper link by selecting the hyperlink and pressing the Delete key on your keyboard
55. and fill colors 7 Right click outside the text area to complete the modification STEP RESULT The text appears on the drawing and in the Markup Navigation Tree To move the text box click and drag it Click and drag the frame handles of the text box to enlarge it ADDITIONALINFORMATION To edit the text double click the text box in the tree or in the workspace Hiding the box surrounding the text TASK 1 Select the text box entity 2 From the Markup menu select Format and then select Markup Entity Attributes STEP RESULT The Markup Entity Properties dialog appears From the Text Box Visibility list select OFF 4 Click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To undo repeat steps 1 through 4 except selectON STEP RESULT The dialog closes and the text box is hidden ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 250 MARKUPS ADDING A NOTE Adding a Note You can attach longer comments as a markup sticky note on the drawing A note displays in the workspace as a standard size graphical symbol 3 Each note is labelled as Note lt n gt where n represents the numerical order of occur rence of the note for example the first note is labelled as Note1 To read the note double click the entity to open it or move the mouse over the entity to display the tooltip NOTE When creating multiple Note entities it is possible to group the entities Once the Note entities are grouped clicking on the group opens the last Note created
56. and then select Attach ment ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Attachment X 2 Click on the drawing where you want to add an attachment STEP RESULT The Attach Filedialog appears 3 Inthe Link Name field enter a name for the attachment Optionally you can also provide a brief description of the attachment in the Description box 4 In the URL field enter the path to the file or click Browse The File Open dialog appears 209 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES 5 Select the file or click Browse and click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can attach any local file or any DMS file 6 From the Open In list select one the following A new applet window Opens the attachment in a new AutoVue window Current applet window Opens the attachment in the current AutoVue window Associated application Opens the attachment in its associated appli cation 7 Click OK to close the Attach File dialog STEP RESULT The attachment appears on the markup workspace and in the Markup Navigation Tree 8 Right click in the workspace to complete the attachment Opening an Attachment To open an attachment do one of the following Double click or the attachment icon in the workspace or Markup Naviga tion Tree IfA new applet window was selected while attaching the file it will open the attachment in a new AutoVue window If Current applet wi
57. another resource 3 Click OK to close the Properties dialog ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 40 WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES Adding an Overlay When working with 2D files you can overlay other files over the current active file You can also adjust an overlay move an overlay and scale an overlay by defining the X and Y coordinates and the scaling factor When working with a raster file it should be used as the base file because raster formats are opaque and would hide files underneath them TASK 1 Open the file that you want to use as the base file for the overlay 2 From the File menu select Import File as Overlay STEP RESULT The Overlays dialog appears 3 Click Add File STEP RESULT The Please Select an Overlay File dialog appears 4 Select a file to overlay and then click Open To add another file repeat steps 3 through 4 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can hide display certain overlays by selecting deselecting corresponding check boxes in the Visibility column 6 When done click OK to close the Overlays dialog RESULT The base file is displayed with the selected overlay files on top of it Modifying an Overlay TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Overlays STEP RESULT The Modify Overlay dialog appears Select the overlay that you want to modify Click the Action that you want to apply to the overlay Click Move if you want to move the overlay Click a poin
58. are creating a markup entity you can press the Escape key to cancel In Markup mode you can choose from several measure options to create markup measure entities From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Measurement to access the following measure options 233 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS CREATING 2D VECTOR MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES Option Angle Measure the angle between selected points From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Angle Description Measure an arc entity From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Arc isu Q Area Measure a selected area From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Area A Distance Measure the distance between two points From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance ame 2D Vector Snapping Modes The available snapping modes allow you to click to precise geometrical points on a drawing For example if you select Snap to End Point and you move the cursor over an end point of a line the end point will be highlighted by a snap box The snapping modes allow you to snap to the mid center and end points of an entity Button Snap to Description T End point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near a linear component s end point Mid point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when acl moving the cursor near the hal
59. business benefits organizations can expect to achieve This manual explores AutoVue s key capabilities and is designed to help you get the most out of AutoVue s extensive functionality Oracle AutoVue Oracle AutoVue is a viewing and markup application that has been developed for both business and technical users AutoVue is capable of displaying hundreds of file formats without the authoring application Supported file types include Text Office Graphics EDA 2D Engineering Drawings and 3D Models Even contents of archive files can viewed in AutoVue NOTE Although not required we recommend that file names include their stan dard file extensions If the file extensions are not included AutoVue may require additional time to load a file Oracle AutoVue is available in various product variations Refer to the Auto Vue Product Variations Feature Matrix document to see what features are available for each variation ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 14 INTRODUCTION MARKING Up DOCUMENTS Marking Up Documents AutoVue has the ability to create markups for all its readable file formats without the document s authoring application AutoVue creates markups for different formats without modifying the original file You can attach comments notes and drawings to any file you display in AutoVue This is called marking up a file commonly known as annotating or redlining A markup is an object or entity that you attach to a file All
60. by angle arms with an arc connecting them Move the cursor to increase or decrease the radial and arc length Click again to complete the measurement STEP RESULT The measured line path angle measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measured angle also appears in the Measurement Entities dialog To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles You can click and drag the value box anywhere on the drawing ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To make another measurement click Reset Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Use the Arc option to define an arc in the drawing and measure its radius center and diameter TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Arc ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Arc Q pa STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 228 MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS 2 From the Arc Info Length list select the unit in which you want to measure the arc 3 From the Measured Angle Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle The options are degrees or radians 4 Select Add Radius if you want to measure the radius of the arc Select Add Diameter if you want to measure the diameter of the arc 6 Click three points on the drawing to define the arc you want to measure
61. casas nnna a a a a A a ade tea 26 Op ning File Smis isnie hsna in seis snn ioon nsnsi tists 26 Opening a Local Files ns yessnsniananiiian i e EAN AE aR a 27 Openinga URLen inanahi RO SER aiaa RON UE RUS SO Ne NOTES Ors aaa SOW ORR 27 Opening a File from Agile PLM uu sessessssssessscssssssccesssscssssnccsssssccssssecsuscascsuceaccsscsscessesscsnceaceasesscsneess 28 Opening a File from a Backend DMS System cssssssssscsecssccssecseecssccsseeseecsccssessecsucesscessecssceseense 28 Streaming FINES Asr ressegar eaa ee AAE EA AASE ee TEN a eSEE eRe asro vente Eeee osrin 30 AEA ETEA AEE EA E EA a caltead au 30 File PYOpErti Shriners sarni a eri rE SN S SNES EES ERNE NS 30 Navigating a Document with Multiple Pages ssssssssssseeesssssssssssseccseesssssssseoseeesssssnsssesseeeseeonsssss 31 Work no MA Ee ES a EE R A he ease eas io an Gonos 32 SS AN STAIN UIE soc vecccacas ces sayecnsca AE A eave can A bella E A S 32 2D Viewing OPtiO N Secesticescpeveastincesisbcesnsecdidecenneced Saceachenaksaodduda encdnemeans E E edad laa 33 Using the Pan and Zoom Window s ssssesssssssssseseeessessssssesseessessnsssssseecseessessnssseeseeoressnsssseseeeseessesssss 36 Working With 2D Vector Filesi a e E T a 37 Manipulating 2D Vector Files ccsssssssessesseesssssessssssessecsscsssssscsuscsessnseacesssescsssesscsnseaccascescesseaeeensenses 37 Selecting WY Ss ccacevseces teatvessest aan e A E A I i os 42 SpecifVing a VIEW Pointes iien E A R ene eat A
62. current active file 115 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES CREATING 3D Mockups The imported files must be 3D and have similar dimensions TASK 1 From the File menu select Import File for Mockup STEP RESULT The Mockup dialog appears 2 Click Add STEP RESULT The Open dialog appears Enter the file name or browse to locate the file you want to import 4 Click Open STEP RESULT The file appears in the Mockup dialog To import more than one file repeat steps 2 to 4 5 The Enter Markup Mode check box is selected by default If you dese lect it any modifications you make to the mockup are not saved 6 Click OK to the close the Mockup dialog ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Once open you can position these models in the desired manner using the Transformation tool RESULT The file or files you imported appear in the workspace See Transforming a 3D Model Deleting Models from a Mockup The following steps explain how to delete models from a mockup TASK 1 From the File menu select Import File for Mockup STEP RESULT The Mockup dialog appears 2 Select the file or files that you want to remove 3 Click Remove STEP RESULT The file or files are removed from the list 4 Click OK to close the Mockup dialog RESULT The file or files disappear from the workspace ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 116 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MANIPULATING DISPLAY OF A 3D MODEL Manipul
63. custom line color 276 custom line thickness 277 fill color 279 fill type 278 leader alignment 280 line color 276 line style 277 line thickness 277 278 markup layers 280 text box visibility 280 Markup file 15 create 198 export 201 import 201 open 200 save 199 200 save view 198 set active 202 view 202 Markup files 197 Markup Filter 196 markup information 199 Markup Navigation Tree 25 195 Markup Panel 25 195 316 measurement units and symbols 275 moving markups 266 nesting entities 252 265 note 251 264 rotating selected markups 266 selecting markups 266 signoff 214 history 215 re approve 215 rescind 215 stamp 217 stamp library 218 delete 219 text 249 text box visibility 250 transforming markups 266 ungrouping 269 working with markup entities 265 mass properties 130 131 Measure Distance 2D non vector 51 52 measurement units and symbols 275 Missing Resource icon 40 missing resources 40 missing XRef notification icon 114 Model tab 23 108 Model Tree 23 108 113 114 115 hiding 115 XRefs 114 Models tab 23 108 N native print settings 288 Navigation Panel 19 60 66 Bookmarks tab 21 65 110 Components tab 21 62 customizing 61 Models tab and Model 23 108 Models tab and Model Tree 23 108 Nets tab 22 63 Views tab 24 109 net connectivity 70 Nets tab 22 63 317 O open file 26 Markup file 200 Oracle AutoVue 14 P pan and zoom window 36 partial print preview 292 pen settings 291
64. in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measured distance Delta X and Delta Y appear in theMeasurement Entities dialog 6 To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles 7 Youcan click and drag the text box anywhere on the drawing ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To make another measurement click Reset 8 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog 225 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Measuring Cumulative Distance Use the Cumulative Distance option to measure the distance along a path of multi faceted adjoining points TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Distance ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Measurement Entities dialog appears From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance sum 2 Fromthe Measured Distance Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance Select Cumulative 4 Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point Continue clicking points along the path that you want to measure STEP RESULT Each point is joined by a line 6 Right click to complete the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To make another measurement click Reset STEP RESULT The measured line path cumulated measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The cumu lated measured distance Delta X and Delta Y appear
65. in the Oracle AutoVue documentation library Installation and Configuration Guide Viewing Configuration Guide Release Notes Supported Formats List Product Variations Feature Matrix ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 12 PREFACE CONVENTIONS Conventions The following text conventions are used in this document Convention Meaning boldface Boldface type indicates graphical user interface elements associated with an action or terms defined in text or glossary italic Italic type indicates book titles emphasis or placeholder variables for which you supply particular values monospace Monospace type indicates commands within a paragraph URLs code in examples text that appears on the screen or text that you enter 13 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL Introduction Oracle s AutoVue suite of enterprise visualization solutions provides native document viewing markup and real time collaboration capabilities that enable Web based document review on hundreds of native document types including 2D 3D CAD EDA Office and graphic formats AutoVue enterprise visualiza tion solutions address the challenge of accessing reviewing and collaborating on documents both internally and with globally dispersed teams and partners in a secure and reliable manner without compromising security or precision Improved team productivity reduced errors and accelerated innovation and time to market are just a few of the
66. in the tree STEP RESULT The 2D options appear In measurement mode when you move the cursor within a predetermined snap radius the snap box appears for the entity to be selected To change the snap radius change the value in the Snap Radius field The snap radius is configured in pixels NOTE You must restart the AutoVue client for the configuration to take effect Overlays Extents Settings When you add overlays AutoVue automatically tries to scale the overlay extents to match the base file extents If you wish to disable this behavior clear the Match Extents checkbox in the Overlays section of the 2D Configure dialog Configuring Colors The Colors settings let you modify colors for 2D files From the tree expand 2D and then select Colors to display the following options Option Description Background Change the color of the background for 2D files Measurement Modify the color you want displayed when taking measurements on 2D files ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 178 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 3D FILES Configuring AutoVue for 3D Files There are configuration options that you can set to customize the work environ ment when working with 3D files TASK 1 From the Options menu select Configure STEP RESULT The Configuration dialog appears 2 From the Category tree select 3D STEP RESULT The Rendering Dynamic Rendering and Frame Rate options appear
67. perimeter measurements appear in the Measurement dialog 13 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Measuring an Angle Use the Angle option to measure the precise angle between points on a drawing TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Angle ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Angle lt STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the angle between three points The snapping modes are displayed STEP RESULT The snapping modes are displayed Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring 4 Select Between 2 lines if you want to measure the angle between two lines 5 From the Measured Angle Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle 6 Ifyou selected From 3 Points click three points on the drawing to define the angle If you selected Between 2 lines click two lines on the drawing to define the angle STEP RESULT Angle arms appear with an arc connecting them 7 Click again to complete the measurement STEP RESULT The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measurement appears in theMeasurement Entities dialog To change the size of the arc click and drag it to the desired size To move the value box click and drag it to anywhere on the markup ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANU
68. retrieves the entity information from the server Clear this option if you do not want this behavior every time your mouse hovers over an entity TASK 1 From the tree select EDA 2 Under the Mouse Hover heading select or deselect the Show Entity Information Tooltip option 3 Click OK Modifying 3D View You can configure the board thickness and component height for the 3D PCB view of EDA files Note that these Board Thickness and Component Height values are used only if the underlying EDA file does not contain board thickness and component height information TASK 1 From the Configuration tree select EDA 187 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR EDA FILES 2 Enter a value in the Default Board Thickness field to change the board s thickness ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Default Board Thickness option only affects boards that have no board thickness defined in the design If a board has a defined thickness this option does not affect that board 3 Enter a value in the Default Component Height field to change the component height ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Default Component Height option affects components that do not have height defined in the design If a component has a defined height this option does not affect that component 4 Towork with a different unit of measurement select another unit from the Default Units list This is the unit of measurement used fo
69. select model parts from the Model Tree or from the workspace to high light them in the Model Tree and on the model You can also select a model part and have all its identical parts appear highlighted on the model and in the Model Tree You can also configure the Selection Highlight Select Model Parts from the Workspace TASK 1 Select a part or parts on the model in the workspace ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one model part press the Shift or Control key while selecting 2 To select the parent entities of a selected part press the Shift key and select the part again STEP RESULT A pop up appears listing the parent entities of the selected part Select an entity from the pop up list The selected part or parts appear high lighted on the model and in the Model Tree 3 To select a group of parts from the Edit menu select Select then click and drag the mouse around the parts RESULT The entities within the box are selected and highlighted in the Model Tree If the selected entity is hidden in the Model Tree the Model Tree expands to display the selected entity Selecting All Identical Parts of a Model Select a model part in the workspace or from the Model Tree Right click and select Select Identical Parts All identical parts are highlighted on the model and in the Model Tree If there are no identical parts found a message appears indicating No identical parts found You can also select sub as
70. stead EE EEEE E EENE AORE AEA EE 119 Changingithe Visibilityssssiss Serseri diade coves cate cite cco sdkcustosaleasdnsedds tua drudecseesvascueeoineess 120 Changing Model Colossenses 121 Adjusting the iranspareney acs ante ect uk cama Adkateei deel cent ekauanen 121 LER UTA SS an A e E A E EE E T vdenw doses A A E E baie ood A 122 Setting Ambient Lighting ssssssssseessessssssssseeseessessssssesseesseessnsssssseeeseosssssssseesresrssssssssesereserssnssseseresres 122 S tting Directional LightihG sssos sssri sisese e in wen s a ke esiisa ssanie 123 Adding a New Light SOURCE ss ssseesssssssssssseeessesssssesseecseesssssssseesseesssssnsssesstresreosssssesseeeereossssssseeereeorssss 123 Changing the Light Properties ccsessssssessssssssscsssscssecsscssssssccessssssussacessesscesssssesuseacesssescessesseaes 124 Removing a Light SOUNCE issacsssecivesessses corsa dssantidorcdaitesastieaia ERRE wa A ERNS 125 BIDA A AE ERE AE ETEO EA O A TETAAN 125 Default NWN casaicscccea aces ian ola Eten site naiaiaee alana elles aah ada Clea acta 125 Setting Standard or Camera ViQWS ccsecssssssssssssssssesssscssssscsssssscsssssessuceaceaseseesssssecsuseaceasesscesseaseens 125 Setting Native VIEW Sits case ce neccedeacesvatetnccesecassdtoscestiocsesascadussdsersapethceeruiedecesuautlusccht hamesbertaeonee oeceraeonit 126 Creating a User Defined View sneren aa a e EE a i eet 126 Deleting a User Defined VieW ssssssssseseessssssssssssceessesssssssse
71. the distance measurement TASK 1 Measure distance between two points or measure cumulative distance 2 From the Distance tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Distance Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance 3 From the Units list select the unit to which you want to calibrate the distance 4 Select Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance to a value 5 Select Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance by a factor 6 Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration result appears in the Measurement dialog 7 Click Close to close the Distance tab ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 244 MARKUPS CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES Measuring Area Use the Area option to measure the area and perimeter of a region TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Area ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Area 2 STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 Select Between Points if you want to measure the area between points on a drawing Snapping modes are displayed 3 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select all snapping modes click All On To deselect all snapping modes click All Off 4 Select Shape if you want to measure the area of a predefined shape on the drawing 5 From the Me
72. the entity you can specify the minimum and maximum dimensions an entity must be between Location specifies an axes aligned boundary box you can specify the dimensions for an axes aligned boundary box that an entity must be inside TASK 1 From the Entity Search dialog click the Advanced 3D Search tab Entity Search 3D Search Advanced 3D Search Volume C Enabled Minimum Dimensions Maximum Dimensions Location Enabled Point 1 Point 2 2 Tosearch for entities by Volume select the Enabled check box ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you want to search for entities that match all three dimensions select the Completely contained check box If the check box is deselected then an entity only has to match one dimension in order to appear in the Results list 157 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES PERFORMING AN ADVANCED 3D SEARCH 10 Enter the minimum and maximum dimensions in their respective fields From the Units list select the unit you want to set for the Volume dimensions To search for entities by location select the Enabled check box ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you want to search for entities that match all three dimensions select the Fits completely check box If the check box is dese lected then an entity only has to match one dimension to appear in the Results list From the Units list select the unit you want to set for the Location dimensions Enter the dimensions for
73. the points for the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select all snapping modes click All On To clear all snapping modes click All Off See 2D Vector Snapping Modes for more infor mation Select Arc Entity if you want to measure a predefined arc From the Arc Info Unit list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance From the Measure Angle Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle If you selected From 3 Points click three points on the drawing to define the arc STEP RESULT The points are joined by an arc The measurements for center point coordinates radius diameter arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Measurement dialog If you selected Arc Entity click the edge of the arc that you want to measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To take another measurement click Reset STEP RESULT The arc is highlighted The measurements for center point coordi nates radius diameter arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Measurement dialog Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Calibrating an Arc TASK 1 2 Measure an arc in the drawing From the Arc tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Radius Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance From the Units list select a unit of measurement to which you want to calibrate the distance Click Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate to
74. to measure the distance Select Cumulative 6 Click the first entity to define the starting point 7 Continue clicking points along the path that you want to measure STEP RESULT Each point is joined by a line 8 Right click to complete the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement STEP RESULT The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measured distance Delta X Delta Y and the Manhattan Distance appear in the Measurement Entities dialog 9 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Calibrating Distance Calibrate the distance measurement TASK 1 Measure distance between two points or measure cumulative distance 2 From the Distance tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Distance Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 236 MARKUPS CREATING 2D VECTOR MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES Measuring Area 3 From the Units list select the unit to which you want to calibrate the distance 4 Select Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance to a value 5 Select Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance by a factor 6 Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration result appears in the Measurement dialog 7 Click Close to close the Distance tab Use the Area option to measure the are
75. toolbar you can also click Leader Click a point on the document where define the Leader anchor point Move the cursor to draw the Leader ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To draw a Leader segment and force it to be aligned to the closest axis vertical or horizontal hold the Shift key while moving the cursor To draw a Leader with multiple line segments repeat steps 2 and 3 as often as you like You can click then drag as often as you like Right click to end the Leader A text box appears at the end of the Leader In the text box enter the text you want to attach to the Leader STEP RESULT The height of the text box will resize to fit the entered text To change text box font properties from the Markup menu select Format and then select Font ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the respective font property lists on the Markup Properties toolbar you can also modify the font type style and size STEP RESULT The Font dialog appears allowing you to change the font type style and size Click OKto implement the font changes and to close the Font dialog To change the line properties or fill color of the Leader select the Leader then from the Markup menu select Format and then select the property or properties you want to change ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the respective line property lists on the Markup Properties toolbar you can also modify the line style line thickness fill types and fill colors 223 ORACLE AUTO
76. value 4 To translate the model by set values enter the X Y and Z value To view a mirror image in the Mirror section of the dialog select a check box 6 To scale the model by a factor enter a scale factor in the Factor field Click Apply 8 To apply absolute transformation instead of incremental select the Absolute check box 9 Click Apply 10 To repeat a transformation deselect Absolute then continue clicking Apply ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To set the model to its original transformation click Reset 11 Click Close to close the Transformation dialog STEP RESULT The transformation state remains displayed RESULT 141 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES SECTIONING To restore the default state of a part of the model from the Manipulate menu selectTransform and then select Reset Selected To restore the default state for the whole model select Reset All Sectioning With the Sectioning feature you can view the cross section and cut through of 3D models In the Define Section dialog you can define the section plane posi tion section plane orientation and the cut through Section Plane Options In the Define Section dialog you can use the following options to define the orientation of the section plane Option XY Plane Description Section plane is oriented along the XY plane YZ Plane Section plane is oriented along the YZ plane XZ Plane Section pla
77. views TASK 1 Expand the Captures tree to display the defined captures 2 Right click the selected captures and then select Activate RESULT The model and PMI entities display in the workspace as defined in the selected capture 135 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES MANIPULATING A 3D MODEL Reference Frames PMI Hyperlinks The Reference Frames configuration entity highlights the grouped PMI entities TASK 1 Expand the Reference Frames tree to display the predefined reference frames 2 Right click the selected reference frame and then select Activate RESULT The grouped PMI entities are highlighted in the Model Tree PMI entities can also include hyperlinks To fire a PMI hyperlink do the following TASK 1 From the Model Tree or workspace double click the PMI hyperlink entity STEP RESULT The 3D Hyperlink dialog appears if there are multiple hyperlinks associated with the selected PMI entity 2 From the 3D Hyperlink dialog select a link and then click Fire RESULT The selected link opens Manipulating a 3D Model You can rotate 3D CAD models along a specific axis You can scale a model part up and down as well as translate the model In Manipulate Mode you can resize translate and or rotate selected parts of the model When you select one or more model parts AutoVue displays a model size representation of the Global Axes going through the selected p
78. 2 PMI initial visibility 182 rendering 179 section highlight 183 selection 185 186 show global axes 185 tree level 185 base font 177 CAD file options 173 common 183 189 desktop office 192 EDA 186 3D PCB view 187 3D view 190 colors 189 cross probing 188 dim unselected 186 187 highlight entity 186 synchronize layers 188 thicken highlighted entity 187 tooltips 187 font paths 176 general options 173 graphic files 191 measurement 177 paths 175 raster files 174 rendering 174 resources 174 XRef paths 175 convert 296 file 299 options 296 PDF 298 pen settings 300 size 298 create markup layer 204 cross probing 83 85 net connectivity 86 two or more EDA files 83 zoom behavior 188 zooming 86 custom color 279 custom line color 276 custom line thickness 277 D delete markup layer 207 314 markups 269 design verification 90 94 design rule checks 90 exporting results 95 drawing information 47 set of entities 48 single entity 47 tag attributes 47 dynamic load mesh resolution 181 E EDA 60 3D views 83 ascend hierarchy 73 BOM 88 comparing PCB 87 cross probing 83 design hierarchy 72 design verification 90 entitiy properties 70 entity properties 68 entity search 96 97 98 filtering entity types 68 layer sets 79 layers 74 manipulating views 82 measuring 99 angle 104 arc 105 calibrating arc 58 106 165 229 240 248 260 calibrating distance 53 101 162 226 236 244 257 distance 101 minimum dist
79. ACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 164 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MEASURING IN 3D FILES Select Arc Entity if you want to measure a predefined arc STEP RESULT All arc and circles are highlighted on the model Snapping modes are disabled Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the arc between three points STEP RESULT Snapping modes are enabled Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring From the Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the arc distance If you selected From 3 Points click three points to define the arc STEP RESULT The points are joined by an arc The measurements for center point coordinates radius diameter arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Measurement dialog If you selected Arc Entity click the edge of the arc that you want to measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To take another measurement click Reset STEP RESULT The arc is highlighted The measurements for center point coordi nates radius ratio arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Measurement dialog Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Calibrating an Arc TASK 1 2 Measure an arc in the drawing From the Arc tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Radius Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance From the Units list select a unit of measurement to which you want to calibrate the distance Click Calibrate to and enter
80. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also drag the white ball outside of the large ball STEP RESULT The direction of the light reflected on the 3D model automatically changes with the movement of the white ball The Custom option is selected when you adjust the position of the light To set the light direction to its default setting select Default Click Close to close the Lighting dialog Adding a New Light Source TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visual Effects and then select Lighting STEP RESULT The Lighting dialog appears Select the Two lights option STEP RESULT Anew light source appears as a black ball in the 5 o clock position 123 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES LIGHT SETTINGS 3 Toadd more light sources right click inside the square surrounding the ball and select Create New Light Source from the pop up menu STEP RESULT The Custom option is selected and the new light source appears as a white ball 4 Click and drag the small ball until you achieve the desired lighting To restore the light source to its default setting select Default 6 Click Close to close the Lighting dialog RESULT You can have a total of eight light sources at a time Changing the Light Properties TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visual Effects and then select Lighting STEP RESULT The Lighting dialog appears 2 To change the properties of the light such as colo
81. AL 238 MARKUPS CREATING 2D VECTOR MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES Measuring an Arc 10 To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement 11 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Use the Arc option to measure the precise radius length and angles of any arc on the model It also calculates the center point location TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity Measurement and then Arc ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Arc a STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 Select Arc Entity if you want to measure a predefined arc STEP RESULT All arc and circles are highlighted on the model Snapping modes are disabled 3 Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the arc between three points Snapping modes are displayed 4 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring STEP RESULT All entities of the selected entity types are highlighted on the model 5 From the Dist Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the arc distance 6 From the Angles Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle 7 Ifyou selected From 3 Points click three points to define the arc STEP RESULT The points are joined by an arc 8 Ifyou selected Arc Entity click the edge of an arc STEP RESULT The arc is highlight
82. ANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES LAYER SETS Viewing Layer Sets AutoVue lists top bottom and default layer sets as well as any layer set that is stored in the file You can choose to display any layer set you need You can also create user defined layer sets and display them later To view a layer set take the following steps TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Layers STEP RESULT The Layers dialog opens 2 From the Layer Sets list select the layer set you want to display 3 Click Apply STEP RESULT The selected layer set displays in the workspace 4 To restore the default layer set from the Layer Sets list select Default Click Close to close the Layers dialog ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also view the layer sets from the Layers list beside the Layers button amp on the AutoVue toolbar Creating User Defined Layer Sets You can define a layer set and save it for the duration of the session The layer set you defined is added to the Layer Sets list in the Layers dialog and to the Layers list on the AutoVue toolbar By default the Top Bottom and Default layer sets and any other layer sets belonging to the file are listed in the Layer Sets list TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar y
83. An authentication dialog appears 3 Enter the login information and then click OK STEP RESULT The search criteria options load in the File Open dialog 4 Enter the search criteria and then click Search ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Alternately to view all files in the backend DMS system leave the search criteria fields empty and click Search STEP RESULT The file results appear in the dialog For each AutoVue session all search results are saved and can be referenced from the File Open dialog as Search Results 1 Search Results 2 and so on 5 Select a file and then click Open RESULT The file opens in the AutoVue workspace 29 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL AUTOVUE BASICS OPENING FILES Streaming Files Archive Files File Properties AutoVue generates streaming files for most supported file formats When a file is accessed by AutoVue for the first time a streaming file is generated The streaming file contains file data and provides the benefit that AutoVue can access the streaming file much faster than it can the native file As a result rendering time is significantly faster when loading from the streaming file If the native file changes or its external resource files change or if an INI option changes the streaming file is invalidated In this case AutoVue opens the display from the native file and generates a new streaming file The full archive file directory displays in the Auto Vue window It is not
84. AutoVue GUI can be customized by the system administrator The GUI that is displayed is dependent upon whether it is customized and on the type of customization Navigation Panel The Navigation Panel displays by default on the left hand side of the AutoVue workspace when you view a drawing For example when viewing an EDA drawing it allows you to navigate through a list of component instances nets and the associated pins and net nodes pins connected to a net present in the current schematic drawing or Printed Circuit Board PCB design NOTE To hide or display the Navigation Panel click ig The columns displayed in the Navigation Panel are determined by the profile of the entity types in the current schematic drawing or PCB design Lists can be sorted in order to group similar component instances 19 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL AUTOVUE Basics AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE You can also use the Navigation Panel to select highlight single or multiple components or entities zoom to a component or entity and query entity infor mation Components vu Components RefDes Part Type Locatior U4 BOFPC6 29 0001 Ci CAPAE1 51 0001 C2 CAPC321 7 00001 C3 CAPC321 7 00001 C4 CAPC321 7 00001 ut SOP63P 50 0001 U2 SOP63P 50 0001 0i RESC16 7 00001 RESC16 7 00001 _ R2 RESC16
85. BEFORE PRINTING 2 Click Partial Preview in the Print Properties dialog STEP RESULT The Partial Print Preview dialog appears and highlights the area that will be printed The Paper size Printable Area and Drawing Area are displayed 3 Click OK to close the Partial Print Preview dialog Previewing a File Before Printing You can preview a print copy of the current active file on screen according to your printer s capabilities and the print property settings TASK 1 View the file in AutoVue 2 From the File menu select Print ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Print STEP RESULT The Print Properties dialog appears Configure the print properties 4 Click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can print the file from the Print Preview window by clicking Print You can also zoom in and out of a file as well as navigate from one page to another of a multi page file STEP RESULT The file appears in Print Preview Mode in the Print Preview window 5 Click Close to close the Print Preview window 293 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL PRINTING PRINTING A FILE Printing a File Batch Printing You can print original files along with their Markup files and selected markup layers together so that they appear as one file TASK 1 2 Open the file you want to print To print the associated markups open the Markup file or files you want to print If you are pri
86. CH Performing an Entity Type based Search The following steps describe how to perform an entity type based search TASK 1 10 11 From the Edit menu select Entity Search ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Entity Search amp STEP RESULT The Entity Search dialog appears Click the Entity Types tab From the Entity Types list select an entity type ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To sort the list by attribute click the attribute column heading that you want to sort by STEP RESULT A list of attributes for the selected entity type appear If you want to search by attribute select an attribute from the Attribute list If you want to search by value select a value from the Value list Click Add Filter STEP RESULT The selected attribute and its corresponding value appear in the list Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you have all the filters you want Click Apply Filter s ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To remove a filter select the line in the list containing the attribute and value you do not want to use as a filter then click Remove Filter STEP RESULT A list of entities matching the search criteria appear showing the column headers for the entity s available attributes To save the results click Export Result STEP RESULT The Save dialog appears Specify the file name and the directory where you want to store the file then click Save STEP RESULT AutoVue saves the
87. Compare ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Exit Compare E RESULT The original file appears in the AutoVue workspace Bill of Material BOM For EDA files you can obtain a list of the components and parts required for manufacturing the item featured in the schematic drawing or PCB design The Bill of Material BOM report produces a count of the unique components or parts needed for manufacturing It lists the quantity required component name reference designators value for resistors and capacitors size and descriptions When determining the uniqueness of a component the count considers only the attributes chosen for inclusion in the report output It includes only those attributes that provide the most accurate and unique component quantities TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Generate Bill of Material STEP RESULT If you are generating a BOM for a schematic with multiple pages a dialog appears prompting you to select the BOM scope Current page or Entire design Generate BOM BOM Scope Entire design ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 88 WORKING WITH EDA FILES GENERATING BILL OF MATERIAL BOM 2 Click OK after making your selection STEP RESULT The Generating BOM dialog appears listing the attributes of the file Generate BOM Please select attribute s that determine the uniqueness of a component part Attribute _ Part Type Loc
88. Distance tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Distance Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance 3 From the Units list select the unit to which you want to calibrate the distance 4 Select Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance to a value 5 Select Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance by a factor 6 Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration result appears in the Measurement dialog 7 Click Close to close the Distance tab Area in non Vector Files Use the Area option to measure the area and perimeter of a region TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure G OPImONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure pam Fl STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears displaying the measurement options 2 Click the Area tab 3 Inthe Area Units list select a unit of measurement in which to measure the area of the region 4 Inthe Perimeter Units list select a unit of measurement in which to measure the perimeter of the region ADDITIONAL INFORMATION In the Net Area Result group select Add to cumulate anet area result of different areas select Subtract to subtract an area from the net area result and select Clear to clear the Net Area Result field 5 Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point 53 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 2D FILES MEASURING IN 2D FILES Continue clickin
89. E oat vs ceca as eeu std onan 83 Cross ProODING resse n seyendcas ges en k a aa Ia Ee A AE ua SSNS 83 Cross Probing Between Two or More EDA Files ssssssssseesesssssssssseccseessssssssooseeesssssnsssesseeeseronssssss 83 Cross Probing Between 2D and 3D Views of the Same File sssesssssssssssseeesssssssseoseeesesssssssss 85 Showing the Net Connectivity when Cross Probing sssesessresersersesserserserseeesesessrseessesesssssssss 86 Zooming when Cross Probing see sssseeessessssssssseeeseesssssssssoeseessosssssseoseressessnsssesstesseosnsssssseeesressssssssseeere 86 Comparing a PCB with PAPE WV OIC esssssssssssseeessesssssesseeeseessssssssseceeeesssssnsseeseeeosesnssssessereseeossssesseeeseessessssssseree 87 Generating Bill of Material BOM ssssssssseeessssssssesseeeseessssssssseeceeesnssnssseoseeessessssssesseresessnsssssseeesressossssseessee 88 De sign VEFRCAtiONn ssniestsiscsienreanniennoneniaicen nine EEP SOs COENE SSSRi EErEE ENt 90 Design R le CHECKS iis sassecicvssasiestsnsescorssasetionscatsarsde EE AA dana E Rs 90 Verifying a Designia uneasiness 94 Exporting the Design Verification Results c esssssssssescsseseesssssessnssscssscseessscsessncescesscsscesseseesncenses 95 Searching Using Entity Search assie a a S S 96 Performing an Entity Type based Search sssssssssssecsscccscsssccnsesssesssesscesssessscsscessccsecesseesscencesses 97 Performing an Attribute based Search u ccssscsssssesssssnsss
90. ER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES MEASURING IN 3D FILES Measuring an Angle Measuring an Arc Use the Angle option to measure the precise angle between any three vertices or any two edges planes faces or any combination of these entity types TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure Ke STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears Click the Angle tab Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring STEP RESULT Entities of the selected types are highlighted on the model To measure the angle between an entity type and a plane select the With Plane check box and then select the plane from the list From the Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle Click two points on the model to define the angle STEP RESULT Angle arms appear with an arc connecting them Click again to complete the measurement STEP RESULT The angle is highlighted and the value of the angle measurement appears in the dialog To take another measurement click Reset Use the Arc option to measure the precise radius length and angles of any arc on the model You can also calculate the center point location TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure kal STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears Click the Arc tab OR
91. ESULT The exploded state is saved See Resetting the Transformation of a 3D Model Comparing 3D Files When comparing 3D files in a non integrated environment we recommend that you use Universal Naming Convention UNC file names or the server protocol so as to ensure that all required sub assemblies and parts are retrieved from correct paths For information on UNC file names and the server protocol refer to the Installation and Configuration Guide AutoVue provides the ability to compare two 3D files or two sets of entities from the same file or different files and display color coded comparative data Gener ally when comparing two files you should first open the newer version of the document and then compare it with the older version When comparing files AutoVue displays three windows e The right window displays the newer version of the document e The left window displays the older version of the document The bottom window displays the comparison results By default the result windows display added deleted and unchanged entities The Compare Tree displays the model s hierarchy with a State column displaying different icons representing the results of the file comparison The icons indicate if an model part has been added modified moved amp or deleted In the Comparison Result window you can specify whether you want to display only the additions deletions or unchanged or any combination of the three
92. ETER E E o EE E RE S NS 147 Comparing Entity SOUS osei neei ei aae E EEE VEE eee ETARE EEE lessons 148 Generating a Bill of Material eesssssssssssseeesersssssesseeeseessssssssseesceessessnssosseeeseessnssessseeereeosossssseesreesresssssesse 150 A ETE E E EAE E OAA E E uiamueee Atveuan eanetn kates 152 Performing SAIC R R R E NO RRN A 154 Performing a 3D Text S arch ccsssssessssssesssssesssssessessscsssssssnscsessuceacssscsscsssssessnscascsnseasessesscsnseseeasees 155 Performing an Attribute based SearCh sessssssseeesessssssssseeseesssssssssoesceessessssssssseeserossssssssesreeessesss 155 Performing an Advanced 3D Search ssesssssssssssssesssssessnssscsssssscsssssssnseacssscsecsusesessussasssscescesseseesnseseeasess 157 Saving Search RESUS oinean a se aeaea EE a 158 Measuring iN 3D EMSs ts vassscusestsen ies teapssa stats oN acrstasuaneasseauatee aa chan enennecanicmn anata ae NEE aE Geos 159 3D Snapping IV OSS s mnan sea e a EE sess sup cu vos enc E E e S Eese 159 Measuring Distance ccc tee teicslsettea cua neetai eas uae dasa ulate isan Saaai 160 Calibrating DIStanCe s caissiasseastiassaensasniednaiytdindenanandentronaieiieeiauninasunes 162 Measuring MINIMUM DistanCe csscsccicscscceecceccsescscssatsencassscusteceascesseaeis densstastecentndhecinnemaeranecde 163 Measuring aN ANg Einans a En E RAS 164 ETa EEAS EE E E E NEEE EON E EESE 164 Calibrating an AFC n A NN NS 165 Measuring Vertex Coordinates ccsscsessscssssssssss
93. Error Report for a list of mass properties that could not be calculated 5 To change the density change measurement units or configure computation of inertia tensor click Options STEP RESULT The Options dialog appears 6 Click OK to close the Options dialog Click Close to close the Entity Properties dialog Configuring Mass Properties From the Mass Properties tab you can change the density the measurement units or configure the reference point of inertia tensor TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Show Entity Properties ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click in the workspace and select Show Entity Properties or in the Model Tree select the model part or parts then right click and select Show Entity Properties STEP RESULT The Entity Properties dialog appears 2 Click the Mass Properties tab 3 Click Options STEP RESULT The Options dialog appears 4 To change the density enter a value in the Density field To change the density units select the unit for Mass and Length from their respective lists in the Units section 6 To apply the density to model parts with unknown density select Use Only for Parts with Unknown Density To apply the density to all model parts select Use for All Parts 8 To change the display units select the unit for Mass and Length from their respective lists in the Display Units section 131 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES ENTITY PRO
94. INFORMATION You can also right click in the workspace and select Show Entity Properties or in the Model Tree select the model part or parts then right click and select Show Entity Properties STEP RESULT The Show Entity Properties dialog appears 4 Click the Extents tab ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 132 WORKING WITH 3D FILES PMI ENTITIES File Properties 5 You have three extents options a Select Transformed if you want to view the extents after you have transformed the model b Select UnTransformed if you want to view the extents of the model without transformation c Select Oriented if you want to view the X Y and Z coordinates of the reoriented model or selection 6 Click Close to close the Entity Properties dialog The File Properties tab provides file related properties of the selected entity such as author date of creation keywords title and so on To view the file properties select a part or the whole model and then select Analysis and then Show Entity Properties From the Entity Properties dialog appears click the File Properties tab PMI Entities A 3D file s Product and Manufacturing Information PMI is composed of annotations that are included in design files These annotations indicate the limits and constraints that must be observed during the production of the object displayed in the 3D model At the highest level PMI provides information about dimensions feature control frames
95. ION If you selected Cumulative continue clicking points along the path that you want to measure STEP RESULT The measured line path appears as an entity on the current active markup 7 Move the cursor and click a location on the drawing to display the measure distance STEP RESULT The measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measured distance Delta X and Delta Y appear in theMeasurement Entities dialog 8 To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles 9 You can click and drag the text box anywhere on the drawing ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To make another measurement click Reset 10 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog 235 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS CREATING 2D VECTOR MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES Measuring Cumulative Distance Use the Cumulative Distance option to measure the distance along a path of multi faceted adjoining points TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Distance ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring 3 To select all snapping modes click All On To deselect all snapping modes click All Off 4 Fromthe Measured Distance Units list select the unit in which you want
96. ITIONAL INFORMATION All attributes tagged as Hidden during Stamp design also display in the DMS Attributes dialog The dialog contains three columns that include attribute values defined in the design stage The Name column displays the attribute name as defined in the design stage It either displays the backend DMS ERP PLM UCM system defined attribute name or the user defined name The Value column displays the value that is currently on the Stamp The Value from DMS column displays the value assigned from the backend system 2 To modify any value of the Stamp double click the Value cell corre sponding to the attribute If the attribute does not have Edit permissions the value cannot be modified If the attribute is defined as Hidden then the attribute is displayed in the DMS Attributes dialog You may edit the value of a Hidden attribute but it does not display in the workspace If the attribute is a non constrained list then you may either select a value from the list or enter your own value If the attribute is a constrained list you may only select from the list If the attribute is a multi valued list then you may select a value from the list AutoVue appends this value to any pre existing values using a semi colon as a separator ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 232 MARKUPS CREATING 2D VECTOR MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES If an attribute is defined with Hidden permissions then the value from t
97. L of the file to open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION For example http AutoVueServer files abc dwg or ftp ftpserver1 com files abc doc 4 Click Open RESULT The file opens in the AutoVue workspace 27 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL AUTOVUE BASICS OPENING FILES Opening a File from Agile PLM To open a file from Agile PLM do the following TASK 1 From the File menu select Open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Open File ex STEP RESULT The File Open dialog appears 2 From the left panel click Agile ti ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Files located in Agile PLM are displayed in the dialog 3 Select a file and click Open RESULT The file opens in the AutoVue workspace Opening a File from a Backend DMS System When AutoVue is connected to a backend Document Management System DMS system you can open a file located in the system from the File Open dialog Depending on the backend DMS system you are connected to you must enter your username and password when opening files stored in the backend system Refer to your integration documentation for more information on logging onto your DMS system TASK 1 From the File menu select Open STEP RESULT The File Open dialog appears 2 To open a file from the backend DMS system from the left panel click DMS F ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If AutoVue is configured with one DMS system the name of the DMS would appear instead
98. LE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES MANIPULATING EDA VIEWS Saving User Defined Layers Sets with Markups You can save user defined layer sets using Markup files TASK 1 Create custom layer sets 2 From the Markup menu select New ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Markup A Create any markup entities that you need 4 From the Markup menu select Save As STEP RESULT The Save Markup File As dialog appears 5 Enter the markup information and click OK to close the Save Markup File As dialog RESULT The Layer sets you created are saved with the Markup file When you reopen the file during a different session you can view the Layer sets when you open the Markup file See Markups Manipulating EDA Views As with any 2D file with the View options you can instantly manipulate how the current active file is displayed For example you can rotate a file s orienta tion clockwise or counter clockwise by 90 degrees See 2D Viewing Options for more information on View options AutoVue provides several ways to change the view size of a selected area of a file display different views layers and blocks of the current active file You can also navigate from one page to another page of a multi page file ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 82 WORKING WITH EDA FILES 3D VIEW 3D View For some ECAD formats AutoVue supports 3D views of PCB boards TASK 1 I
99. LT The Value list appears corresponding to the selected attribute Select the Any Value check box if you want to search by any value the associated value options are disabled Deselect the Any Value check box if you want to search by a specific value from the Condition set condition for the search and from the Values list select the values that you want to search Click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To add more than one Attribute Filter repeat steps 4 to 8 To edit an Attribute Filter select the filter and click Edit STEP RESULT The Attribute Filter dialog appears allowing you to edit the filter To disable an Attribute Filter deselect the check box beside the filter or filters that you want to disable To enable an Attribute Filter select the check box beside the filter or filters To remove an Attribute Filter in the Entity Search dialog select the filter and click Remove STEP RESULT The Attribute Filter disappears from the list ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 156 WORKING WITH 3D FILES PERFORMING AN ADVANCED 3D SEARCH 13 Inthe Entity Search dialog click Search STEPRESULT A list of entities matching the search criteria appear in the Results list displaying the name and type of the entities 14 Click Close to close the Entity Search dialog Performing an Advanced 3D Search From the Entity Search dialog you can search for entities using volume or loca tion filters Volume specifies the size of
100. MANUAL 284 PRINTING CONFIGURING THE PRINT OPTIONS Print Dialog Section Print Column Headers Option Description Select this option to print column headers Option is only enabled for spreadsheets and archive files Partial Preview Display a view of the printer page highlighting the printable area Configuring the Print Options TASK 1 From the Filemenu select Print ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Print 2 STEP RESULT The Print Properties dialog appears we w N Click the Options tab Configure the print options Configure other print options To view a partial view of the file click Partial Preview STEP RESULT The Partial Print Preview dialog appears 6 Click OK to print RESULT The Print dialog appears indicating the document is printing Print Margins From the Margins tab of the Print Properties dialog you can define the top bottom right and left margins for the printed file You can define 285 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL PRINTING PRINT MARGINS Option Description Margins Set the value for the Left Top Right and Bottom margins Minimum Set the acceptable minimum margins for the selected printer Units Specify the unit for the margins Override Select this option to override the predefined minimum print margins Printing Minimum Margins Setting the Margins TASK 1 Fr
101. NAL INFORMATION You can also enter an Owner Filter or Value Filter in the text box 6 Click Apply Filter s ADDITIONALINFORMATION Select an item in the result list and right click to access options like Zoom Selected and Show Entity Properties STEPRESULT Alist of entities matching the search criteria appear displaying the Owner Type and Value columns 7 To save the results click Export Result STEP RESULT The Save As dialog appears ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 98 WORKING WITH EDA FILES MEASURING IN EDA FILES 8 Specify the file name and the directory where you want to store the file then click Save ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AutoVue saves the results in a csv Comma Separated Values file 9 Click Close to close the Entity Search dialog Measuring in EDA Files In EDA files you can take measurements of distances areas arcs and angles When measuring you have the option to snap to geometrical or electrical points on the drawing From the Analysis menu select Measure to access the Measurement options NOTE From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure The following table outlines the available measuring options Name Description Angle Measure the angle between selected points Arc Measure an arc entity Area Measure a selected area Distance Measure the distance between two points Minimum Distance Measure the minimum distance between two nets NOTE This opt
102. Net Area Result ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 54 WORKING WITH 2D FILES MEASURING IN 2D FILES 10 If you selected Between Points click points on the drawing to define the area STEP RESULT Each point is joined by a line The area and perimeter measure ments appear in the Measurement dialog 11 Right click to complete the measurement 12 If you selected Shape click the edge of the predefined shape STEP RESULT The shape is highlighted and the area and perimeter measure ments appear in the Measurement dialog 13 Click Reset to take another measurement 14 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Angle in non Vector Files Use the Angle option to measure the angle between points on a drawing TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ee INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears displaying the measurement options 2 Click the Angle tab Select a unit of measurement from the Units list 4 Click points on the drawing to define the angle you want to measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement STEP RESULT Angle arms appear with an arc connecting them The angle measurement appears in the Angle tab 5 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog 55 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 2D FILES MEASURING IN 2D FILES Angle in Vector Files Use the Angle option to me
103. OSS PROBING window In this case take the following steps to see the 2D and 3D views of the PCB a In the window s dialog deselect the Automatic option b Select a different view from the TYPE list For example you can switch between Schematic and PCB 3D View 7 Select an entity in the 3D view RESULT The same entity is highlighted in the 2D view of this file NOTE You can select entities in the 2D view or 3D view of the file The selected entities are highlighted in both open views of this file Showing the Net Connectivity when Cross Probing To display the net connectivity of the design when cross probing perform the following steps TASK 1 Select an entity or entities in any open file 2 Right click and select Show Net Connectivity RESULT The net connectivity for the entity or entities that you selected are highlighted in all the files Zooming when Cross Probing When you are cross probing files you can zoom in on the entities you select Zoom in on a selected entity or entities e When cross probing between a schematic drawing and a PCB design e When cross probing between the 2D and 3D views of the same file TASK 1 Select an entity or entities in either one of the open files or views ADDITIONALINFORMATION If you are cross probing between a schematic drawing or a PCB design you can select entities in either file You can also select enti ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 86
104. Oracle AutoVue Desktop Deployment User s Manual ORACLE January 2015 Copyright 1999 2015 Oracle and or its affiliates All rights reserved Portions of this software Copyright 1996 2007 Glyph amp Cog LLC Portions of this software are owned by Siemens PLM 1986 2012 All rights reserved This software uses ACIS software by Spatial Technology Inc ACIS Copyright 1994 2008 Spatial Technology Inc All rights reserved Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation and or its affiliates Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law you may not use copy reproduce translate broadcast modify license transmit distribute exhibit perform publish or display any part in any form or by any means Reverse engineering disassembly or decompilation of this software unless required by law for interoperability is prohibited The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error free If you find any errors please report them to us in writing If this software or related documentation is delivered to the U S Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U S Govern ment the following notice is applicable
105. PERTIES Viewing Extents 9 To compute the inertia tensor based on output coordinate system select Output Coordinate System Origin 10 To compute the inertia tensor based on the center of gravity select Center of Gravity 11 Click OK to close the Options dialog STEPRESULT Mass properties are instantly calculated and displayed in the Mass Properties tab When a mass property cannot be calculated N A displays for that property When this is the case you can also click Error Report for a list of mass properties that could not be calculated 12 To save the changes click Save As STEP RESULT The Save Mass Properties As dialog appears 13 Specify the path where you want to store the file and enter the file name then click Save STEP RESULT AutoVue saves the results in a txt file 14 Click OK to close the Entity Properties dialog The Extents tab displays the orientation coordinates and center coordinates of the X Y and Z axes as well as the width height and depth measurements for any model or selection TASK 1 Select the part or parts for which you want to view Extents To select multiple parts press the Shift or Control key while selecting 2 To view the Extents of the entire 3D model make sure no parts are selected ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also make your selection after you open the Entity Properties dialog 3 From the Analysis menu select Show Entity Properties ADDITIONAL
106. PMI entities 133 aligning 134 configuring 135 captures 135 reference frames 136 views 135 filtering 134 go to 134 hyperlinks 136 PMI filtering 182 PMI initial visibility 182 print 282 file 294 header footer 287 288 margins 285 set 286 options 282 configure 285 partial preview 285 292 pen settings 291 create 292 delete 292 preview a file 293 watermarks 289 add 290 Q Quick Menus 26 R rename markup layer 206 render modes 119 resolve local resources 174 Resource icon 26 S save markups 200 selecting entities 65 selecting views 42 Show Net Connectivity 70 snap settings 178 snapping modes 2D 50 234 3D 159 254 EDA 100 241 specifying a view point 43 streaming file 30 Substituted Resource icon 26 40 substituted resources 40 T text box visibility 280 toggle between layers 206 toolbars 18 tooltips 187 V version information 16 exporting 16 View tab 24 109 Ww walkthrough 168 watermarks 289 workspace 66 X XRef paths 175 318 318
107. Panel select a component in one file that has multiple component occurrences in the other file b From the dialog of the file with multiple component occurrences select one of the components from the Occurrences list or click Next or Previous to switch between component occurrences Chapter 6 scm Scope Automatic Type Occurrences Counter NET19 11 Select any entity in the schematic drawing RESULT The same entity is highlighted in the PCB design Cross Probing Between 2D and 3D Views of the Same File The Cross Probe option lets you select entities to highlight in the 2D and 3D views of the same file TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Cross Probe ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Cross Probe STEP RESULT The Cross Probe dialog appears 2 Click Add File In the Open dialog that appears select the same file then click Open 4 Inthe Cross Probe dialog click OK STEP RESULT The file appears in a new AutoVue window The views that display in each window depend on the contents of file you are cross probing 5 Ifthe file does not contain a schematic one window shows the 2 dimensional view of the PCB and the other shows the 3 dimensional view of the PCB 6 Ifthe file contains a schematic as well as a PCB the schematic view displays in one window and the 2D PCB view displays in the other 85 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES CR
108. Point 1 and Point 2 Click the 3D Search tab Click Search STEPRESULT Alist of entities matching the search criteria appears in the Results list Click Close to close the Entity Search dialog Saving Search Results TASK 1 Perform a 3D entity search 2 Click Search STEPRESULT A list of entities matching the search criteria appear in the Results list displaying the type and name 3 To save the results click Export STEP RESULT The Save As dialog appears 4 Specify the path where you want to store the file and enter the file name then click Save RESULT AutoVue saves the results in a csv Comma Separated Values file ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 158 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MEASURING IN 3D FILES Measuring in 3D Files AutoVue provides the ability to perform measurements in 3D files When measuring AutoVue provides the option to snap to different entity types on the model From the Analysis menu select Measure to access the Measurement options NOTE From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure Sx The following table outlines the available measuring options Name Description Angle Measure the precise angle between any three vertices or any two edges planes faces or any combination of these entity types Arc Measure the precise radius length and angle of any arc and calculate the center point Distance Measure the precise distance betwe
109. Points if you want to measure the area between points on a drawing The snapping modes are displayed 4 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring Select Shape if you want to measure the area of a predefined shape on the drawing the snapping modes are disabled 6 From the Measured Area Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the area 7 From the Perimeter Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the perimeter 8 Inthe Net Area Result section of the dialog select Add to cumulate a net area result of different areas 9 To subtract an area from the Net Area Result select Subtract 103 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES MEASURING IN EDA FILES 10 Select Clear to clear the Net Area Result 11 If you selected Between Points click points on the drawing to define the area STEP RESULT Each point is joined by a line The area and perimeter measure ments appear in the Measurement dialog 12 If you selected Shape click the edge of the predefined shape that you want to measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement STEP RESULT The shape is highlighted The area and perimeter measurements appear in the Measurement dialog 13 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Measuring an Angle Use the Angle option to measure the angle between points on a drawing TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure
110. SK 1 From the File menu select Convert STEP RESULT The Convert dialog appears 2 Click Pens STEP RESULT The pen Thickness dialog appears 3 Inthe From To section of the Pen Thickness dialog select the Color Index for which you want to modify the thickness ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one Color Index press the Shift or Control keys while selecting 4 From the Units list select the unit in which you want to set the thick ness 5 Inthe Thickness field enter a thickness value 6 Press the Enter key STEP RESULT The new thickness value appears beside the selected Color Index in the From To section of the Pen Thickness dialog 7 To save the changes that you made click Save As STEP RESULT The Save As dialog appears Enter a file name for the new pen settings Click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To modify an existing pen setting select the pen setting from the Current Pen Settings list make the changes then click Save STEP RESULT The new pen settings are saved and appear in the Current Pen Settings list 10 Click OK to close the Pen Thickness dialog ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 300 CONVERSION CHANGING THE PEN SETTINGS 301 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL Appendix A EDA Terms and Definitions The following table presents commonly used EDA terms and their corre sponding definitions EDA Term Annular ring Definition A circular strip of conductive material t
111. TH EDA FILES DESIGN VERIFICATION Type 11 Design Rule Check Minimum Route Width Description Specify the minimum route trace width allowed in the design 12 Maximum Route Width Specify the maximum route trace width allowed in the design 13 Minimum Route Length Specify the minimum route trace length allowed in the design 14 Maximum Route Length Specify the maximum route trace length allowed in the design 15 Empty Nets Select this check box if you want to check for any nets that are not connected to any pin via trace and power ground plane 16 Un routed Traces Select this check box if you want to check for any trace segment that is not connected to another trace segment pin via on either end 17 Single Connection Select this check box if you want to check for a net connected to only one pin Power and ground nets are the exception 93 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES DESIGN VERIFICATION Type Design Rule Check Description 18 Short Circuit Select this check box if you want to check for intersections on the same layer of traces that belong to different nets NOTE Trace enti ties will be divided into n sets where n is the number of nets in the design 19 Unconnected Pin Select this check box if you want to check for any pin pad that is not g
112. TOVUE USER MANUAL 230 Markups 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS 4 Inthe workspace click and drag a box to the desired Stamp size STEPRESULT The Stamp dialog closes and the Stamp appears in workspace and in the Markup Entity Tree RESULT Depending on how the Stamp is configured it may appear as a fized size in the workspace or it may be resizable If it is resizable you can select the stamp outline and drag to the desired size If the isotropic option is selected on the stamp it resizes proportionally in all directions To resize the stamp non proportionally your system administrator must updated the Stamp defini tion NOTE Depending the format of the background image when resizing the Stamp attributes and or text may not align properly with the background image To avoid this issue Enhanced Metafiles EMF should be used as the background image Refer to the Oracle Auto Vue Client Server Deployment Installation and Configuration Guide for more information If the Stamp is configured to retrieve backend system attributes then the values of these attributes are displayed on the Stamp in the workspace To modify the text font on the Stamp select the required font and style from the Markup toolbar Viewing Modifying Stamp Attributes The section describes how to view and modify Stamp attributes If your Stamp is configured to read backend attritbutes then the Stamp entity displays these backend attributes Reading values f
113. ULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the angle between three points Snapping modes are displayed 3 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select all snapping modes click All On To deselect all snapping modes click All Off 4 Select Between 2 lines if you want to measure the angle between two lines 5 From the Measured Angle Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle 6 Ifyou selected From 3 Points click three points to define the angle If you selected Between 2 Lines click two lines to define the angle STEP RESULT Angle arms appear with an arc connecting them 8 Right click to complete the measurement STEP RESULT The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measured angle appears in the Measurement Entities dialog 9 To change the size of the arc click and drag the it to the desired size 10 To move the value box click and drag it to anywhere on the drawing 11 To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement 12 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 246 MARKUPS CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES Measuring an Arc Use the Arc option to define an arc in the dra
114. ULT You are now in Manipulate mode Select the model part or parts that you want to scale ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one part press the Shift or Control key while selecting STEP RESULT A model size representation of the Global Axes appears through the model part or parts and are encased by a three dimensional box Click and drag a corner cube of the box up or down to scale the selected model part To exit Manipulate mode click Manipulate 2 or from the Manipu late menu select Manipulate RESULT To restore the default state of a part of the model from the Manipulate menu select Transform and then select Reset Selected To restore the default state for the whole model select Reset All ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 138 WORKING WITH 3D FILES TRANSFORMING A 3D MODEL Transforming a 3D Model Using the illustrated transformation buttons or by entering X Y or Z values you can rotate scale or translate a model or any selection of model parts From the Manipulate menu select Transform and then select Define The Transformation dialog appears as follows Transformation Ready Rotate Degree Translation imm X 0 J0 Z 0 Mirror Scale vz O x O xY E Factor 1 Caso NOTE From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Transform ac In the Transformation dialog the buttons on the left correspond to a rotational movement along the three axes a
115. VUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS 10 Right click outside the text area to complete the modification ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To edit the Leader text double click the Leader in the tree or in the workspace STEP RESULT The text appears on the drawing and in the Markup Navigation Tree Creating 2D non Vector Markup Measure Entities When marking up 2D non vector files in addition to all the markup options available for 2D files you can create markup measure entities The measure options in Markup mode work a bit differently than in View mode See 2D Specific Markups When measuring in Markup mode the specified measurement lines and values are displayed on the current active markup layer as entities These entities can be moved resized or deleted You can also modify the font of a measure entity align a free snap measure entity to the horizontal or vertical axis as well as add units of measure and symbols to a measurement and have them appear on the drawing NOTE When you are creating a markup entity you can press the Escape key to cancel Measure options vary between vector and non vector files For vector files AutoVue provides the option to snap to fixed points on the drawing For non vector files you can only free snap In Markup mode you can choose from several measure options to create markup measure entities From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Measure
116. Via string Definition The copper etch that exists between a SMT pad and a corresponding fanout via Zero length connection An unrouted connection between layers where the end points in the connection have the same X and Y coordinates Zone An area on a PCB layer designated as copper or anti copper Copper zones may have net names while anti copper zones may not ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 308 APPENDIX A EDA TERMS AND DEFINITIONS 309 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL Feedback If you have any questions or require support for AutoVue please contact your system administrator Some customization and maintenance must be done on the server and cannot be implemented on the client machine If the adminis trator is unable to resolve the issue please contact Oracle Corp General Inquiries Web Site http www oracle com us products applications auto Vue index html Blog https blogs oracle com enterprisevisualization Sales Inquiries E mail autovuesales_ww oracle com ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 310 FEEDBACK CUSTOMER SUPPORT Customer Support Web Site http www oracle com autovue index html 311 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL Index Numerics 2D markup entities 220 markups 208 219 measuring 50 non vector angle 55 arc 57 area 53 calibrating distance 53 101 162 226 236 244 257 distance
117. a Polyline entity to be aligned to the closer axis horizontal or vertical press and hold the Shift key while you click and drag for that line segment See Aligning a Line Segment to the Vertical or Horizontal Axes Stamp Adds a Stamp to a document that includes specific document and user information metadata pulled directly from the DMS ERP PLM UCM system From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Stamp 2 See Creating a Stamp Text Add text to the markup From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Text AL See Adding Text Adding a Freestyle Entity You can create a freestyle markup entity You have the option of making the entity non contiguous or contiguous Creating a Contiguous Freestyle Entity TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Freestyle ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Freestyle 221 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS 2 Click a point on the drawing where you want to start the Freestyle entity Move the cursor to create the Freestyle entity 4 Right click to end the Freestyle entity Creating a Non Contiguous Freestyle Entity TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Freestyle ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Freestyle De 2 Click a point on the drawing where you wan
118. a and perimeter of a region TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ee moNAt INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure mam STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 2 Click the Area tab 3 Select Between Points if you want to measure the area between points on a drawing The snapping modes are displayed 4 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring Select Shape if you want to measure the area of a predefined shape on the drawing the snapping modes are disabled 6 From the Measured Area Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the area 7 From the Perimeter Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the perimeter 8 Inthe Net Area Result section of the dialog select Add to cumulate a net area result of different areas 9 To subtract an area from the Net Area Result select Subtract 10 Select Clear to clear the Net Area Result 11 If you selected Between Points click points on the drawing to define the area STEP RESULT Each point is joined by a line The area and perimeter measure ments appear in the Measurement dialog 237 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS CREATING 2D VECTOR MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES 12 Ifyou selected Shape click the edge of the predefined shape that you want to measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement STEP RESULT The shape is highlighted The area and
119. a pad track zone or via that defines the nearest approach allowed by conductors of another signal set Jumper wire A discrete electrical component or wire used to make electrical connections between points that have no copper etch due to board density or some other factor Keepout An area fill within which no routing is allowed ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 304 APPENDIX A EDA TERMS AND DEFINITIONS EDA Term Definition Land The copper pad needed for a surface mount pin Layer The copper pad needed for a surface mount pin Manual routing Individual connections in the form of traces vertices arcs and so on which are entered manually into the PCB design Mounting hole A hole used for the mechanical support of a PCB or for the mechanical attachment of components to a PCB Multi layer board A PCB that has multiple layers separated by dielectric material with connectivity between layers established by vias or through holes This term usually refers to a board with more than two layers Net A logical construct circuit that originates in a schematic and is transferred to a board to describe required electrical connections The connections may be completed by using vias tracks or zones Net list List of names of symbols or parts and their connection points which are logically connected in each net of a circuit A net list can be extracted electron
120. a value Click Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate by a factor ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 58 WORKING WITH 2D FILES MEASURING IN 2D FILES 6 Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration results appear in the Arc tab 7 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog 59 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL Working with EDA Files In addition to all the features that are available for generic 2D files AutoVue also provides intelligent querying for EDA files you can create modify layer sets generate BOM perform intelligent measurements analyze nets and components set enhanced display options and global transparency and much more For information on the available features for EDA files refer to the following sections Navigation Panel The Navigation Panel displays by default on the left hand side of the AutoVue workspace when you view a drawing For example when viewing an EDA drawing it allows you to navigate through a list of component instances nets and the associated pins and net nodes pins connected to a net present in the current schematic drawing or Printed Circuit Board PCB design NOTE To hide or display the Navigation Panel click ig The columns displayed in the Navigation Panel are determined by the profile of the entity types in the current schematic drawing or PCB design Lists can be sorted in order to group similar component instances ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 60 WORKING WITH
121. a value if you want to calibrate to a value Click Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate by a factor Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration results appear in the Arc tab Click Close to close the Measurement dialog 165 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES MEASURING IN 3D FILES Measuring Vertex Coordinates The Vertex Coordinates option provides the coordinates of vertices on the model TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure 3 STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears Click the Vertex tab STEP RESULT All vertices on the model are highlighted From the Units list select the unit in which you want to measure Move the cursor over the highlighted vertex that you want to measure STEP RESULT The X Y and Z coordinates appear in a tooltip Select the vertex ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To take another measurement click Reset STEP RESULT The X Y an Z coordinates appear in the Measurement dialog Click Close the close the Measurement dialog Measuring the Length of an Edge Use theEdge Length option to measure the length of any edge on the model TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure al STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears Click the Edge Length tab STEP RESULT All edges on the m
122. ance 102 snapping modes 100 241 net connectivity 70 net instances 71 net properties 71 selecting entities 65 66 entity seach dialog 67 terms and definitions 302 zooming to an entity 67 enable look ahead 174 entity properties 129 attributes 129 130 314 extents 132 mass properites 131 mass properties 130 entity properties dialog box 68 entity reference 112 entity search dialog 67 export Markup file 201 F file convert 299 file properties 31 open 26 print 294 file properties 30 31 133 file version information 16 files archive 30 open from server 28 29 open local 27 open url 27 properties 30 streaming file 30 fill color 274 279 fill type 278 filtering entity types 68 font 274 font paths 176 frame rate 180 From 48 G GUI 17 H header footer 287 import Markup file 201 insert codes 287 L layer sets 79 315 user defined layers sets create 80 delete 81 save with markups 82 viewing 80 layers 74 128 188 changing color 78 changing order 75 logical layer visibility 77 logical layers 74 sorting 79 physical layer visibility 76 physical layers 74 leader alignment 280 line color 274 276 line style 277 line thickness 277 M makrups hyperlink 252 265 Markup Entity Properties dialog 275 Markup entity toolbar 18 Markup file 15 Markup files 197 Markup Filter 196 Markup Indicator 26 194 markup layers 280 Markup Navigation Tree 25 195 Markup Panel 25 195 markups 194 197 2D 219 markup e
123. and then select List Tags Attributes 2 Click in the area of the file for which you want to view information on block attributes and tags ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If there are no entities within the selected box a message appears informing you that no entities were found and prompts you to select again STEPRESULT The Block Attributes dialog appears displaying the attributes tags for the selected entity 3 Click OK to close the Block Attributes dialog 47 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH PDF FILES Viewing Information for a Set of Entities The Entity Information option allows you to view information ofa set of entities contained in a specific area of a drawing TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Show Drawing Information and then select Entity Information 2 Click and drag to highlight the entities for which you want to view entity information ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If there are no entities within the selected area a message appears informing you that no entities were found and prompts you to select again To exit right click the mouse anywhere in the workspace STEP RESULT The List Entities dialog appears displaying the information of all the selected entities 3 Click OK to close the List Entities dialog Working with PDF Files This section lists AutoVue features that are specific to Adobe PDF files Navigating Through Markups When navigating through markups
124. and then select Go To NOTE When selecting Go To feature when viewing PDF files Auto Vue highlights the markup entity and preserves the current zoom level Creating a Markup File To create a Markup file TASK 1 View a file that you want to markup 2 FromtheMarkup menu select New ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click New Markup RESULT AutoVue enters Markup mode and a new Markup file appears in the Markup Navigation Tree See also Creating a Markup Layer ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 198 MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP FILES Entering Markup Information When creating a markup you can provide user information that you can save with the markup From the Markup menu select Properties The Markup Information dialog appears Enter a user name department company name company location and tele phone number Click OK to save your markup information and to close the dialog Saving a New Markup File To save a new Markup file TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Save ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click Save Markup id STEP RESULT The Save Markup File As dialog appears displaying the Markup Information that you entered when creating the markup Save Markup File As Markup ID Markup Information User Department Company Location Telephone ie Cancel Exp
125. and to the collapse the whole tree Enable the Align with current UCS option to automatically align the manipu lators with the current User defined Coordinate System The following Selection options let you define how AutoVue indicates that an object is selected Option Description Highlight Bounding Box Selection is enclosed in a wireframe box Highlight Enti Selection is indicated by changing color guig ty y ging 185 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR EDA FILES Walkthrough The following Walkthrough options let you configure the view to use when you enter walkthrough mode and to control whether or not you want to see the Walkthrough dialog at startup Option Description Restore Last View Select this option to save the last view of the model before exiting walkthrough mode As a result when you re enter walkthrough mode the last view displays Show Walkthrough Select this option if you want the Walkthrough dialog to display dialog on startup when you start walkthrough mode Clear this option if you do not want to see the Walkthrough dialog on startup Configuring AutoVue for EDA Files There are configuration options that allow you to customize your work envi ronment when working with EDA files To access the EDA configuration options from the Options menu select Configure In the Configuration dialog that appears select EDA in the
126. ange how the active file is displayed in the workspace by choosing from a number of different view options For example you can zoom into an area of the drawing magnify a part of the drawing and rotate a file s orientation clockwise counterclockwise When viewing 2D vector files you have access to entity information views saved in the drawing and the ability to intelligent snap when performing measurements All the information is obtained by AutoVue by referencing various sources either internal files or external reference files that are located outside the file In addition to the features mentioned this chapter provides detailed informa tion on how you can modify AutoVue to suit your needs and preferences through a broad range of configuration options Searching Text You can perform a text search on 2D vector and text based documents AutoVue provides search options that you can use to customize a search These options are as follows NOTE You cannot perform a text search on raster files ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 32 WORKING WITH 2D FILES 2D VIEWING OPTIONS Option Description Match Whole Word Only Match a complete word Match Case Search for a word or text string with specific capitalization Search backward in the document Down Search forward in the document From the Edit menu select Find Text STEP RESULT The Find dialog appears Enter the word or phrase that you wa
127. anging OB ect Ord ef sxvcseoratetarcanieinenccasein a E A R EN 267 Hiding All Markup EMtitiesiic i sissesesssscsessssssesasassiscss sssconsnssesasasvesaseas sas nesivessaitscaappanchantennsanesmneaundentensaeys 267 Hiding Markup Files a densastectsasensasseiteninisacineaeideaniacdisaatanaiadeuinntand aaneiieniades 268 Grouping and Ungrouping Markup Entities sessessscsssssecssssessssscsssssecssssseesesescesssecsnseseeses 268 Deleting Markup ENUItie S occas cs vevcsesusoostauycvceccveas a e a e aa 269 Formatting Markup Entity Properties s sssssssssssssssseeeeereersereeeserereseeeeesreseeereereerseresersrrsresessessessssssssssss 269 Changing LNE CO saiisine s E aas a aese enin 270 Changing Line Stylesin aE i aE AE TE 270 Changing Line TRIEKNES S isisssisssiserssssscsrveieianteisstiesivensipserieeaneiieenaniarnnoeusdeeninianmusnnesens 271 Changing Arrow Style ances esses cass ceasecnscaecsonstrascnsccscdesecagessbens dcusnbsdseachvbccawsanseqtnconsnesdcnuslogtocsssnsdasteidens 272 Changingihill EypEsse enansa ethos ere ecoe iene tana Souk a 272 FFP PACH MEES OI esac touy sense svesvasyeacvenc divs vn envanst A EN E EA 273 Assigning a Markup Entity the Same Color as the Layer ssssssesssscssecsecssccssesseecsecensessecsseess 274 CHANGING ONE As sarin oisetasisii dita eranarsu adie a ade aaa ais 274 Changing Measurement Units and SyYMbOIs cssssssscssecssccssecseecseccnsceseecseceseessecsscessesseeeseersees 275 Using the Markup
128. ant to select as the end point for the measurement STEP RESULT All entities of the selected entity types are highlighted on the model 7 On the model select the entity you want to measure to STEP RESULT The location of the entity appears in the To field 8 Click again to complete the measurement STEP RESULT The measured line path appears in a value box entity on the current active markup The measured distance Delta X Delta Y and Delta Z appear in the Measurement Entities dialog 9 Drag to move the measured line path 10 Click on the measured line path 11 To move the value box click and drag it to anywhere on the drawing 12 To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement 13 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Calibrating Distance Calibrate the distance measurement TASK 1 Measure distance between two points or measure cumulative distance 2 From the Distance tab click Calibrate STEPRESULT The Distance Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance 3 From the Units list select the unit to which you want to calibrate the distance 4 Select Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance to a value 257 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS 5 Select Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance
129. art or parts of the 3D model ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 136 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MANIPULATING A 3D MODEL Panning a Model Along the X Y and Z Axis TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Manipulate ne INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Manip ulate 3 STEP RESULT You are now in Manipulate mode 2 Select the model part or parts that you want to pan ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one part press the Shift or Control key while selecting STEP RESULT A model size representation of the Global Axes appears through the model part or parts and are encased by a three dimensional box 3 Click and hold the mouse button on the arrow at the end of the axis that you want to pan 4 Drag the mouse to where you want to move the part or parts To exit Manipulate mode click Manipulate 2 or from the Manipu late menu select Manipulate ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To restore the default state of a part of the model from the Manipulate menu selectTransform and then select Reset Selected To restore the default state for the whole model select Reset All Rotating a Model Along the X Y and Z Axis TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Manipulate ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Manip ulate ode STEP RESULT You are now in Manipulate mode 2 Select the model part or parts that you want to rotate ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select mo
130. asure B STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 2 Click the Arc tab 3 Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the arc between three points Snapping modes are displayed 4 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring To select all snapping modes click All On To deselect all snapping modes click All Off See EDA Snapping Modes Select Arc Entity if you want to measure a predefined arc 6 From the Arc Information section select the unit in which you want to measure the distance of the arc 7 From the Measured Angle Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle 8 Ifyou selected From 3 Points click three points to define the arc STEP RESULT The points are joined by an arc The measurements for center point coordinates radius diameter arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Measurement dialog 105 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES MEASURING IN EDA FILES 10 If you selected Arc Entity click the edge of the arc that you want to measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To take another measurement click Reset STEP RESULT The arc is highlighted The measurements for center point coordi nates radius diameter arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Measurement dialog Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Calibrating an Arc TASK 1 2 Measure an arc in the drawing Fr
131. asure the angle between points on a drawing TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure m iia INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure a STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears displaying the measurement options 2 Click the Angle tab 3 From the Angle Definition section select one of the following From 3 Points Measure the angle between three points Between 2 Lines Measure the angle between two non parallel lines 4 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring To select all snapping modes click All On To deselect all snapping modes click All Off See 2D Vector Snapping Modes for more informa tion 6 Select Between 2 lines if you want to measure the angle between two lines 7 From the Measured Angle Units list select the unit 8 Ifyou selected From 3 Points click three points on the drawing to define the angle 9 Ifyou selected Between 2 Lines click two lines on the drawing to define the angle ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement STEP RESULT Angle arms appear with an arc connecting them The angle measurement appears in the Measurement dialog 10 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 56 WORKING WITH 2D FILES MEASURING IN 2D FILES Arcin non Vector Files Use the Arc option to define an arc in the drawing and calculate its arc center radius diameter and arc l
132. asured Area Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the area 6 From the Perimeter Units list select the unitin which you want to measure the perimeter 7 To cumulate a Net Area Result of different areas select Add in the Measurement Entities dialog 8 To subtract an area from the Net Area Result select Subtract 9 Select Clear to clear the Net Area Result field 10 If you selected Between Points click points on the drawing to define the area STEP RESULT Each point is joined by a line and the measurement appears in the Measurement Entities dialog 11 If you selected Shape click the edge of a predefined shape on the drawing STEP RESULT The shape is highlighted 12 Right click to complete the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement STEP RESULT The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The area and perimeter measurements appear in the Measurement Entities dialog 13 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog 245 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES Measuring an Angle Use the Angle option to measure the angle between points on a drawing TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Angle ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Angle 2 STEP RES
133. at you want to be able to select in the workspace Deselect the check box beside the entity types that you do not want to select ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select all entity types select the column header check box Deselect the column header check box to deselect all entity types 4 Click Apply to apply the changes Close OK to close the Entity Filter dialog RESULT Only the selected entity types remain displayed in the workspace When you click in the workspace only the entity types checked in the Entity Filter dialog will be highlighted Entity Properties The Entity Properties dialog displays detailed information about any selected entity in the current schematic drawing or PCB design To view the Entity Prop erties dialog first select an entity from the workspace and then from the Anal ysis menu select Show Entity Properties ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 68 WORKING WITH EDA FILES ENTITY PROPERTIES NOTE You can also double click an entity in the workspace or right click an entity in the workspace Navigation Panel or Entity Search dialog and then select Show Entity Properties Entity Properties Associations Entity Info E lt Component Instance gt Pin H RefDes U5 Part Type SSOP50P620 200 40M Location 50 000000 20 000000 0 000000 Rotation 0 000000 Component Definition SSOP50P620 200 40M Glued false Layer Top Number of Connections 0 On the left s
134. ated This ensures a manageable file size when loading If changes need to be made to a linked file they need to be done in one location the linked file itself Creating a Hyperlink TASK 1 From the Markupmenu select Add Entity and then select Hyperlink ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Hyperlink Yo 211 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES 2 Click a point on the document where you want to place the hyperlink STEP RESULT The Establish Hyperlink dialog appears Establish HyperLink Link Name Description URL Open in anew applet window Enter a Link Name 4 Optionally enter a Description Type the URL or click Browse to locate the file that you want to link to ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Make sure to include the http protocol in the URL If the protocol is not included or if no value is entered in the URL field then an error message is thrown when the Hyperlink markup entity is opened 6 From the Open In list select where you want the hyperlink to open Open in Description A new applet window Opens the file in another Auto Vue window Current applet window Opens the file in the current Auto Vue window A new browser window Opens the file in the default browser window A current browser window Opens the file in the current browser window ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you are creating
135. ated Hole Visibility Description Select whether to use the native settings or turn on off the plated hole visibility NOTE Applicable to Cadence Allegro format only Non plated Hole Visibility Select whether to use the native settings or turn on off the non plated hole visibility NOTE Applicable to Cadence Allegro format only Pad Filling Select whether to use the native settings or turn on off pad filling NOTE Applicable to Cadence Allegro format only Line Caps Joins Select whether to use the native settings or turn on off line caps joins NOTE Applicable to Cadence Allegro format only Global Transparency Move slider to select global transparency level Configuring Background Colors for Graphic Files Specify background colors for mono raster files and color raster files TASK 1 From the Options menu select Configure STEP RESULT The Configuration dialog that appears 191 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING BACKGROUND COLORS FOR DESKTOP OFFICE 2 Select Graphics in the tree 3 From their respective Background lists select colors for monochrome raster files and color raster files Configuring Background Colors for Desktop Office Specify background colors for the following types of Desktop Office files Docu ment Spreadsheet Database and Archive TASK 1 From the Optionsmenu selectConfigure
136. ated nodes for the selected nets nes Cosme Name Parti User LOG D14 No NO proje A D13 NO NO proje D12 NO NO proje D11 No NO proje D10 NO NO proje D1 No NO proje D0 NO NO proje CLRCNT NO No proje s JE gt Nodes on Net Name Net Pin Use Pads N RS 2 clk4 UNSPEC smps50 1 U23 9 CLK4 IN SMDSO 1 U22 13 CLK4 jout smD50 1 Components Nets Bookmarks 7 J Models Tab and Model Tree The Models tab displays the Model Tree The tree displays the model s hierarchy inter relation of different parts assemblies and bodies The tree also indicates if a required external reference XRef is missing With the tree you can select different parts and modify their attributes such as color visibility render mode or transformation See Displaying XRefs for more information on XRefs 23 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL AUTOVUE Basics AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE NOTE The Models tab displays only for 3D drawings Models i Page 1 O M SolidEdge_ilearn se lt C a pa ha top POL oO a a Nee boa idEdge_ boti d i i J e 7 3D5oiidEdge stor C H B 3DSolidEdge_go_ C H B 3DSolidEdge_arre C H B Y 3DSolidEdge_scre C DOoOoOoOWoOoooo OOoOoOoWgoOoooo Models Vi Views Tab The Views tab lists the defaults standard
137. atic Navigating using Ascend Hierarchy With the Ascend Hierarchy option you can navigate from the child schematic to the parent page ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 72 WORKING WITH EDA FILES LAYERS On the child page of your schematic s design hierarchy select an entity in the workspace or in the Navigation panel and then from the View menu select Ascend Hierarchy AutoVue returns to the parent page NOTE You can also right click an entity in the workspace or in the Navigation panel and select Ascend Hierarchy amp If you select an entity that has multiple parents the Ascend Hierarchy dialog appears displaying the parent pages Select the Parent page you want to go to then click OK AutoVue returns to the selected parent page Ascend Hierarchy Please select a page 15 Channel CD Data Flow 17 Channel AB Data Flow 18 Channel EF Data Flow 20 Channel GH Data Flow Cancel NOTE You can also select the entity in the Entity Search dialog then right click and select Ascend Hierarchy Navigating using Descend Hierarchy Layers On the parent page of your schematic s design hierarchy select any hierarchical block in the workspace or in the Navigation Panel then from the View menu select Descend Hierarchy AutoVue opens the page with the selected child schematic You can also right click the hierarchical block in the workspace and then select Descend Hierarchy When working with EDA files Auto Vue le
138. ating Display of a 3D Model AutoVue provides the flexibility to manipulate the display of a 3D model You can rotate scale or translate a model or any selection of model parts You can also navigate from one page to another page of a multi page file You can access these options from the View menu The options are Menu Sub Menu Description Zoom Zoom In Zoom in by a factor of 2 From the Autovue toolbar you can also click Q Zoom Out Zoom out by a factor of 2 From the Autovue toolbar you can also click Q Previous Return to the previous zoom level From the Autovue toolbar you can also click Q or right click in workspace and then select from the menu Selected Resize the object so that the objects selected fill the window Dynamic Zoom Click and drag the cursor up to zoom in or down to zoom out From the Autovue toolbar you can also click ai Zoom Box Click and drag to draw a box around an object that you want to enlarge to fill the window From the Autovue toolbar you can also click E or right click in workspace and then select from the menu Zoom Fit Resize object to fit window From the Autovue toolbar you can also click IB or right click in workspace and then select from the menu Pan Click and drag to reposition the model then release the mouse button From the Autovue toolbar you can also click C or right click in the workspace and then select from the menu
139. ation Ratation Component Definition Glued Layer Number of Connections o O O 0O O al O O Geometry Height Select the attributes that you want to appear in the report Click Generate ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To sort a column by alphanumerical or alphabetical order click on the column heading STEP RESULT The Bill of Material dialog appears listing the count for each component or part possessing the attributes you selected There are also columns displaying the values of the attributes you selected To save the BOM click Export STEP RESULT The Save dialog appears Specify the directory where you want to store the file the file name and extension then click Save ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can specify either pdx Product Data Exchange or csv Comma Separated Values for the extension STEP RESULT AutoVue automatically saves the results ina file with the specified extension Click Close to close the Bill of Material dialog 89 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES DESIGN VERIFICATION Design Verification Design verifications are operations that check the electrical design of a PCB against a set of rules defining physical and electrical design constraints Performing these checks prevent short circuits and process errors The types of design rules are as follows Clearances Design Rule Type Description The minimum spacin
140. available To identify the missing resources click the Resource icon to display the Properties dialog The Substituted Resource icon A indicates that if a required resource is missing AutoVue has replaced it with another resource To identity the substituted resources click the Substituted Resource icon to display the Properties dialog One of the quickest ways to access options is through Quick Menus or context sensitive shortcut menus These are the menus you see when you right click in the workspace Markup Navigation Tree and Model Tree The available Quick Menu options depend on the location where you right click Opening Files You can open base files and Markup files from the File menu and Markup menu respectively ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 26 AUTOVUE BASICS OPENING FILES Opening a Local File Opening a URL TASK 1 From the File menu select Open aa INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Open File gt STEP RESULT The File Open dialog appears 2 Browse to locate the file that you want to open 3 Click Open RESULT The file opens in the AutoVue workspace You can open a file by specifying the URL to the file TASK 1 From the File menu select Open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Open File ee STEP RESULT The File Open dialog appears 2 From the left panel click Web URL p 3 Inthe File name field enter the UR
141. board that appear on the component side The silkscreen is applied over the solder mask Component solder mask The colored usually translucent coating applied to the board over the etched copper It protects the selected areas from the soldering process Connection An unrouted partially routed or completely routed path between two pads In a net with n pads there are exactly n 1 connections Copper pour A method by which a copper zone is filled with a specified pattern with objects that cross the zone or lie within the zone being avoided Copper zone An area on a board designed to be covered by a layer of copper when manufactured Also known as a metal zone Cross hatching The breaking up of large conductive areas by the use of a pattern of lines and spaces in the conductive material Datum A specific location a point that serves as a reference to locate a PCB pattern or layer for manufacture Density On a PCB the degree to which components are packed on the board Generally the density is given as the number of square inches per equivalent i e a lower number indicates a more dense board Discrete components Components with three or fewer electrical connections for example resistors or capacitors Electrical check The process of checking the PCB to ensure that the connections they are on match those specified in the net list 303 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL
142. calculates the center point location TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity Measurement and then Arc ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Arc ce STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 Select Arc Entity if you want to measure a predefined arc STEP RESULT All arc and circles are highlighted on the model Snapping modes are disabled 3 Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the arc between three points Snapping modes are displayed 4 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring STEP RESULT All entities of the selected entity types are highlighted on the model 5 From the Dist Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the arc distance 6 From the Angles Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle 7 Ifyou selected From 3 Points click three points to define the arc STEP RESULT The points are joined by an arc 8 Ifyou selected Arc Entity click the edge of an arc STEP RESULT The arc is highlighted 9 Click to complete the measurement STEP RESULT The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measurements for arc center coordinates radius diameter ratio arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Measurement Entities dialog 10 To move the value box click and drag it to anywhere on the markup
143. causzcete to seteesecte horn enszecnee cea ci aaa a ae eect aooe Aan NERES 57 Calibrating an ArGe ina e cased dave AEE Ee E E ea Ne Rae 58 Working with EDA File S ij cesssiseninieantienivarssein hives ningun snn in ine enni iis 60 Navigation Panelen ananin E a E A EEA AEA R A 60 G stomizing ColuUMN Ss zecsastts tas senna r a E A A E eat OT 61 Kolna oola al Ea F o E N E E E EA E AOIS AE ENE E S 62 NS ETE o EEEE EEO T RATA E 63 Bookmarks Tabiise sennae ena Ae a ead at enacts dea R ia 65 S l cting ENTIE S masseert sE a E N E eaan dase enedoneas ai Sinestesia eeii 65 From the Navigation Panel ccsscssssssssessssssesssssessssssessecsacssscsscsusssessuseaccascssesusssscsnceacssscsecesseseesncenses 66 FOIE VOT pac Enine e E SSE EE E E E ETN E 66 From the Entity Search Dialog sensence RR EA 67 Zooming to a Selected Entity e ssssesseseeseeeeeeesereerserserseeseeseesreeeeereerseeseeseessessessnsssssnsnssnnsensnnsen enesesse ees 67 Filtering Entity Ty DOS cassaccecs cscs secca hssschcacuschawsdetsovbvadcdutesddalienssastecheubeasdoep asaschuns se a a a a 68 Entity Propertie Sien enuan E ureter axa E EA Aa a A AA 68 Viewing the Properties of an ENtity cssescsscsscsscscsecssecssccsscessecssecssesssccscceseessscesccesccscessecseeeseeeses 70 Navigating Desig Hierarehyiux meren R eens E RRE 72 Navigating using Ascend Hierarchy s eserserserserserserseesersreseeereseseessessessessessessnsssssnsssssessensensessesees 72 Navigating u
144. ce File Reference File Resources section of the dialog and are preceded by a amp 3 Click OK to close the dialog ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 114 WORKING WITH 3D FILES CREATING 3D Mockups Selecting Model Parts from the Model Tree TASK 1 2 Click the Models tab Select the part or parts from the Model tree ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one model part press the Shift or Control key while selecting RESULT The selected part or parts appear highlighted on the model and in the Model Tree Hiding Model Parts You can hide specific parts of a model or display specific parts and hide the rest of the model TASK 1 Select the part or parts on the model or from the Model Tree ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one model part press the Shift or Control key while selecting STEP RESULT The selected part or parts appear highlighted on the model and in the Model Tree To hide the selected part or parts right click a selected part on the model or from the Model Tree and select Hide Part STEP RESULT The selected part or parts are hidden on the model To display the selected part or parts and hide the rest of the model right click a selected part on the model or from the Model Tree and select Hide Rest STEP RESULT The selected parts are displayed in the workspace and the rest of the model is hidden Creating 3D Mockups You can import other 3D Models into the
145. ce citer T T A ial ee R eatin 206 Toggling between Markup Layers sssssssscsssssscssccssecssecssscssecssccssesssessscsnsesseesscesscesseesecesseesseeseess 206 Deleting a Markup Layer sacc ccccssscncessicsacsctscecscsasacticastcnssacece asna le cocuseedbcnssdsdcousvshacoasctldenscactconsacistasvlees 207 Moving a Markup Entity to Another Layer sessssscssccssesssecsscsecsscessecseecsscesseeseecaseesecsueesseesseeses 207 Consolidating Markt Filesi siesasssvessinscissanscacavesiastecien sue iedbiant eats ounceadtecoscs aan ameudaaunneanntanees 208 Marking up 2D and feo BM ai cremeernent ene oe etenr terre nen nT meer IRR rE rt nOm er eerie tenn Sens Coren RRS rT ee 208 Adding an Attachment a a a a ough a a EN 209 Opening an Attachment sssssssssssseesssssssseeseeessessssssesstecseeossssssseeceeesssssnsssesseeesressnsssessteeeresnsssssseesrreesssss 210 Editing an Attachment sineresia naan ainiai ana 211 Addinga Hy Berit ne sin aiano isisisi iniae aai i Ee E E rE R nk 211 Creating a agb d 1d Ua annin er eee rr rR Trot nT HR ToT ne AON e ar 211 Openinga Hyperlinks ieies ROI inanin onanan Anne VNR e aneao eRe ETEei 213 Editing a Hyp rlinK ansasen nnana naa i s 213 D letinga Hyperlink sssusa asitik eee naiucataes 213 Adding Signoff ENTITIES sessista Ennn aE r E s a es 214 R scinding tHe Signoff sinsin E R RN NR 215 R Approving a SIGIVON sesine ssie es i EEE aE oE SEa ESSES iin 215 Viewing the History of a Signo ff casera can
146. crcasetaiccceroca ys canascilhcee sae uce tare AEN at eels 187 Modifying 3D VIEW dreed iion aeinn a a r aeeie ea eaii eieo eei 187 Synchronizing Layers when Comparing Files sssssssssssssssesssssssssssssssssssssssesseneenseseenseneeseeseeeeeeeee 188 Configuring Zoom Behavior when Cross Probing ssssssssssessseesssssssscocseesssssssseoseeesssssnssseseeesees 188 Modifying Colors aee aE cele E SEE E N R S 189 Enhanced Display Options ssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssessessesseseeueeseeseeseeeeoseeseesereereererreereereererrereereresresees 190 Configuring Background Colors for Graphic Files ssssssssseessssssssssssceessessnssssssecesensnsssssseesseessssssssesse 191 Configuring Background Colors for Desktop Office ssssessssssseeesessssssssssesceessssssssosseeessessnssesseeesees 192 ENA EE EEA E A EE A A N EEA TEREA E IE AO E EAA 194 Markup Navigation Tre e ssssssssssesseesssssssssesseeesessssssesstesseesosssssssoeseessessnsssssseeesressessssssteseeosesssssseesreeesssssssesse 195 Filtering MarkK p Szenen a RN AE E a E aE 196 Working with Markup Files sssssssssseseessssssssseeseeessessnsssssseecsessnssssssceeseessssssssesseeessessnssseseeessrossnssesseeeereeressss 197 STENE EoI h E AEREE N EEO 198 Creating a Markup File yrs acacecovsvenczeaventecneentuanetevensti neon suunsen inna tes Mesresl uaa a uenadnney 198 Entering Markup Information sesesssssssssseesssssssssssseeesessssssssseeeseesssssssssesseeessesnssssesst
147. d Model is displayed as a skeleton of vertices when in motion Bounding Box Model parts are enclosed by bounding boxes when the model is in motion Current Render Mode Model is rendered in the same mode whether moving or static Frame Rate The Frame Rate slider lets you define the frame rate for rotating and dynamic zooming on 3D files Drag the slider to specify the frame rate Drag the slider to the left for a lower frame rate and to the right for a higher frame rate A higher frame rate results in a lower resolution Optimized Rendering Select the Enable Optimized Rendering option to accelerate the rendering time of drawings Note that NOTE You must restart your Auto Vue client after selecting or deselecting this option to apply the setting Model The Model configuration options let you control the streaming method the dynamic load mesh resolution and the visibility of model parts ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 180 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 3D FILES Loading From the Category tree expand 3D and then select Model to load the Loading Dynamic Load Mesh Resolution Initial Visibility and PMI Initial Visibility options Control the streaming method with the Dynamic Loader option When the option is selected AutoVue loads enough detail to display an accurate visual representation of the model The data is loaded based on the level of detail that is necessar
148. d layer set Click Close to close the Layers dialog 75 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES LAYERS Modifying Visibility for Physical Layers Use the Layers dialog to hide or display specific physical layers in the workspace TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Layers STEP RESULT The Layers dialog opens 2 Inthe Physical Layers section you can show or hide the following Option Description All physical layers Click the All column header One physical layer Select the check box to the left of the layer name You can also select a layer and click Visibility One entity type for all Click the column header For example click the Trace column physical layers header to show or hide all trace entities of all physical layers One entity type for one Click a specific check box physical layer Click Apply to view the changes in the workspace You can now save your changes as a user defined layer set Click Close to close the Layers dialog ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Check boxes for physical layers can have four states checked unchecked gray checked and gray unchecked Check boxes that are checked and gray indicate that the entities of a physical layer are neither all visible nor all hidden Gray unchecked check boxes that you cannot select indicate that
149. d model parts Name The model part name or the displayed page name of the model Render Mode The dynamic rendering used for displaying model or model part For example Shaded Shaded Wire and Wireframe Transparency The value between 0 and 1 representing the model or model part s degree of transparency 0 opaque 1 transparent Visibility The value True visible or False invisible for a model or model part If you are displaying the 3D view of an EDA design AutoVue displays the general attributes mentioned above In addition AutoVue displays attributes specific to the Printed Circuit Board PCB such as component name board side component class and device type 129 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES ENTITY PROPERTIES Ifa 3D file has Product and Manufacturing Information PMI anda PMI entity is selected the PMI attributes are displayed along with the above general attri butes Some of the viewable PMIattributes are X Axis Y Axis font color text font name and tolerance type Viewing Attributes TASK 1 To view the attributes of specific model parts select the parts from the model To view the attributes of the entire 3D model make sure that no parts are selected From the Analysis menu select Show Entity Properties ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click in the workspace and select Show Entity Properties or in the Model Tree select the model part or parts then r
150. dentical Parts Of a Model ou esessssesssssseesssssecsnsssessscsessnscsessncsaccsscseesussssesncensessesees 111 PRR GGIAGGT NYG E EE EE EEE 112 Re Centering a Model to a Selected Model Part s ss esessssssssssssceessessssssssseecsessssssssseoseeessesssssesse 112 Re Center All iienaa annen a eet iais ote shale A EES 112 Entity Referenca cinan ieeoieet ieese csasentesacuencs oa ee rae oe noone R A Oan Sanana aS ENAERE conc 112 Re Centering a Model to an Entity ssssessessessessssssssseseesesseeseeseeseessoseeeoseeeeesereereereereereereeeeeeereeeeeeeersres 113 PAU LEE E A E EE DAE E AE A E 113 Expanding Collapsing the Model Tree cssssesssssscssssssesssssessncsssssscsscssscsesnsssesssssscssecsecsnceaceasees 114 Viewing Missing XRef Notification ICON cccssssessessscssssssssssssssssncencssscsscssscssecucsacsassescesseseesseess 114 Selecting Model Parts from the Model Tree csssssseesssssecssssessecsecsnsssecsncessssscsscsuscaeesscssceseesees 115 Hiding Model Parts wea iictssuvcsessecsises vrai teva EKAA AA E R i RAN 115 Creato SD TV GLI Si ee e r e cout ces A Ee eaa Ea eieae aeee E Er Se ee 115 Deleting Models from a Mockup ccsesssssssssessssssecsncsscsssssscsssssessnscassassescssscssssnscascsnceacessescsnsesseasees 116 Manipulating Display of a 3D Model sssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssessessoseeueeseeseeseseeeseeseesereereereereereereeeereresree 117 Display Attributes srein e a E E E E E a e ey a aas 119 RAAT OTa IE AE
151. display Deselect the check box beside the column or columns you want to hide ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To show all columns click Show All To hide all columns click Hide All 3 To change the column order select the column you want to move then click Move Up to move the column up in the list or click Move Down to move the column down in the list 4 To save the changes you made to the columns select Save column settings STEP RESULT The new column settings will be retained the next time the file is opened 5 Click OK RESULT The changes appear in the Navigation Panel Components Tab NOTE The Components tab displays only for the EDA pages of a drawing The Components tab lists component instances and the associated pins The top portion of the tab lists all the instances of the currently displayed page of the drawing The lower portion of the tab lists the associated pins for selected instances ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 62 WORKING WITH EDA FILES NETS TAB When you select a component it appears highlighted on the drawing To select more than one component press the Shift or Control key while selecting All the selected components and their associated pins are highlighted Components wi Components C345 CAP 0402 2 C344 CAP 0402 1 C343 CAP 0402 1 C342 CA4P 0402 1 C360 CAP 0402 1 CAP 0402 lt Component Pins Name Net Pin U C341 1 3 3VDC UNSF C341 2 GND UNSF ii gt
152. dles ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 36 WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES 4 To view a different area of the file in the AuttoVue workspace click and drag the frame box to the area that you want to view ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you perform a zoom function in the AutoVue work space the area displayed in the workspace is highlighted by the frame box in the Pan and Zoom Window 5 From the Pan and Zoom menu select Exit to close the window RESULT The last view performed remains in the AutoVue workspace Working with 2D Vector Files In addition to all the features that are available for generic 2D files AutoVue provides the ability to access entity information access views saved in the drawing and the ability to intelligent snap when performing measurements AutoVue references various sources to obtain all data required to completely and accurately display vector files These sources can be internal to the file like layers blocks and overlays or external reference files XRefs that are located outside the file Manipulating 2D Vector Files The Manipulate menu option allows you to manipulate how the current active file is displayed For example you can select which layers blocks and external reference files XRefs to display The Manipulate menu options are 37 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES Menu Sub Menu Description
153. drawing but remains in the Markup Navigation Tree Re Approving a Signoff To re approve the signoff that has been rescinded TASK 1 Inthe tree double click the signoff markup entity The Signoff dialog appears 2 Click Approve RESULT The signoff entity re appears on the drawing and the tree Viewing the History of a Signoff TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Signoff ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Signoff 215 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES Adding a Symbol 2 Click History STEP RESULT The Signoff History dialog appears displaying the author date and time the signoff was created 3 Click Cancel to close the Signoff dialog A Symbollis a graphical entity such as a company logo Before a graphic entity can be used as a Symbol it must be added to a Symbol Library You can create a Symbol Library and add Symbols to it You can also add or remove Symbols from existing libraries NOTE When a Symbol is created the graphic entity is converted to a Windows Metafile Format WMF As a result the resulting graphic in the Symbol may differ from the original image as it has been converted to another format In order to avoid these discrepancies in the output it is recommended to use AutoCAD formats as the graphical entity However you may still use any 2D raster image 1 In
154. e 3 Rotate the markup entity by clicking and dragging its control points Pressing the Shift key while dragging will snap the rotation to 45 degree intervals ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 266 MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP ENTITIES Changing Object Order You can change the order of markup entities in a markup layer To move an entity forward or backward do the following TASK 1 Select an entity from the workspace or Markup Entity tree 2 From the Markup menu select Object then select Order and then select one of the following options Option Description To Back Moves the markup entity behind all the other entities in the markup layer To Front Moves the markup entity in front of all other entities in the markup layer Backward Moves the markup entity backward by one level Forward Moves the markup entity forward by one level Hiding All Markup Entities To hide all markup entities do the following TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Hide Markups ADDITIONAL INFORMATION A check mark appears next to the Hide Markups option and the markup entities are hidden on the Markup file 2 To undo the hide option from the Markup menu deselect Hide Markups 267 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP ENTITIES Hiding Markup Files To hide selected a Markup file do the following TASK 1 In the Markup Navigation Tree
155. e expand 3D and then select PMI to display the PMI options The PMI Filtering options let you configure which types of product and manu facturing information to display The check boxes in the Tree column let you select which PMI entity types display in the 3D model tree The check boxes in the View column let you select which PMI entity types display in the workspace The following PMI Text Rendering Style options let you define the style for the PMI text Option Description Native Setting PMI text displays with the default setting from file 3D PMI text displays in 3 dimensions It may not always face you Flat to screen PMI text always faces you Configuring Color With the Coloroptions you can configure the color to allow easier viewing of 3D file details From the Configuration tree expand 3D and then select Colors to view the available Color options They are grouped under Common Section Highlight and Geometry Highlight as follows ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 182 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 3D FILES Common Option Description Background Set the background color for 3D view Selection Set the color when selecting a model or model parts Min Distance Set Set the color of the first set point when measuring minimum distance 1 Min Distance Set Set the color of the second set point when measuring minimum 2 distance Section Highlight
156. e the Note entities are grouped clicking on the group opens the last Note created TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Note ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Note STEP RESULT The Attach To dialog appears 2 Inthe Attach To dialog click the entity type that you want to attach the note to 3 Select the entity on the model that you want to attach a note to STEP RESULT The Note dialog appears 4 Enter the text that you want in the dialog From the File menu select Information STEP RESULT The Note Information dialog appears 6 To change the default font select Font and the type of font 7 Close the Note dialog STEP RESULT The note symbol appears on the entity and in the Markup Naviga tion Tree 8 Right click outside the note area to complete the modification ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To edit a note double click on the note ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Whenever an entity is attached to a 3D model the anchor point the point at which the entity is attached is highlighted by a small square The square is visible only when the anchor point is visible This feature allows you to precisely identify the location of the anchor point and whether the associated entities are visible or hidden Nesting Markup Entities You can add a Note or Hyperlink markup entity as a nested child to other markup entites TASK 1 Add a markup entity to a file
157. e then right click and select Delete STEP RESULT A confirmation prompt appears 2 Click Yes RESULT The view disappears from the tree Displaying the Perspective Projection of a 3D Model The Perspective option shows objects in three dimensions with distances planes and curved surfaces adjusted to give a sense of depth that reflects the desired perspective to the eye NOTE You can use the Perspective option in any of the 3D Views since it is a projection mode rather than a view point From the Manipulate menu select Visual Effects and then select Perspective The depth of the model changes 127 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES 3D VIEWS Viewing a Model from a Particular View Point To view a model from a particular point you can specify a view point TASK 1 From the View menu select Camera Views and then select View Points ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click in the workspace and select Camera Views and then select View Points STEP RESULT The View Point dialog appears Enter the coordinates for X Y and Z a In the Camera Position fields enter the coordinates to determine the position of the camera lens b In the Target Position fields enter the coordinates to determine the position of the 3D model viewed through the camera lens c In the Up Direction fields change the coordinates to values between 0 and 1 to determine the upward orientation Clic
158. e Compare options 45 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES When comparing AutoCAD files you can view a file without viewports To do so from the View menu select View Without Viewports To maximize any of the windows double click the title bar of the window that you want to maximize To restore the window double click the title bar To exit Compare mode from the File menu select Exit Compare ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Exit Compare Moden RESULT The newer file appears in the workspace Align and Scale You can scale or translate a file in order to compare files accurately With the Align and Scale option you can select to automatically align the files select points to align and scale modify the coordinates XOffset and YOffset or enter a scaling factor for the second file TASK 1 While in Compare mode from the View menu select Align and Scale STEP RESULT The Align and Scale dialog appears 2 Select one of the following options Option Description Automatic AutoVue selects the best fit for the two files Select Points to Align Select snapping points to align to Select Points to Align Select snapping points to align and scale to and Scale Custom You can enter a scale factor as well as X and Y offset values XOffset and YOffset are relative to the base drawing and all opt
159. e between entities From the Markup Entity toolbar click Minimum Distance fase EDA Snapping Modes The snapping modes allow you to click to precise geometrical or electrical points For example when you select Snap to Pin move the cursor over the pin you want to select until the pin is highlighted then click Highlight and click a second pin to measure the distance between them The snapping modes allow you to snap to the middle center and end points of an entity as well as a pin via and symbol The following table outlines the avail able snapping modes Button Snap To Description pa End point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near the entity s end point 241 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES Button Snap To Description Mid point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near the halfway point of a linear entity Center point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near the center of an entity Pin Electrical snap mode where a snap box appears when the cursor touches a pin Via Electrical snap mode where a snap box appears when the cursor touches a via Symbol origin Electrical snap mode where a snap box appears when the cursor touches a component Bx Free snap Allows snapping at any point on the drawing IZ
160. e line Distance between and the plane NOTE The lines the line and arc must be parallel i NOTE The line axis must be parallel to the plane Arc Distance between Distance between Center the axes of the the arc axis and arcs the plane NOTE Arcplanes NOTE The plane must be parallel and the arc plane must be perpen dicular Plane Distance between the two planes NOTE Theplanes must be parallel TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity Measurement and then Distance ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 Fromthe Measured Distance Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance 3 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring ADDITIONAL INFORMATION See 3D Snapping Modes for more information STEP RESULT All entities of the selected entity types are highlighted on the model ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 256 MARKUPS 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS 4 Onthe model select the entity you want to measure from ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you want to take more than one measurement from the same starting point select the Fix Position check box STEP RESULT The location of the entity appears in the From lad field 5 Click inside the Tol field to select the entity type that you want to measure to 6 Select the snapping modes that you w
161. e specified level are exploded All entities on the other levels will not be exploded If you are exploding Whole model the number of available levels depends on how many explodable levels exist in the model For example if there are four levels with level 2 being the first level under the main assembly then level 3 and level 4 are added to the list Selected parts the number of available levels to be added to the list depends on the selected virtual tree Animated When selected animation is shown while exploding or imploding the model Show Arrows When selected arrows are displayed in an explosion assembly The arrow starts from an exploded entity and points to the center point of its parent Scroll Explode Dragging the slider gradually displays the progression of the explosion to show the explosion dynamics Explode pressing brings the explosion level to the n 1 level if current explosion level is between n 1 inclusive and n level exclusive Implode pressing brings the explosion level to the n level if current explosion level is between n 1 exclusive and n level inclusive ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 144 WORKING WITH 3D FILES EXPLODING Exploding a 3D Model TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Explode ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also select Explode STEP RESULT The Explode dialog appears 2 Select the parts tha
162. e thickness From the Markup menu select Format and then select Line Thick ness Select the new line thickness from the options provided The line thickness changes for the selected markup entity or entities ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click Line Thickness 5 Alternatively right click the entity in the workspace or Markup Navigation Tree select Format and then select Line Thickness To define a custom line thickness from the Markup menu select Format select Line Thickness and then select Customize STEP RESULT The Custom Thickness dialog appears In the Line Thickness field enter an integer value in pixels Click OK to close the Custom Thickness dialog ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Any new markup entities that you create will have the new line thickness 271 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES Changing Arrow Style AutoVue gives you the option to add an arrow head to certain markup entities For example you can change the arrow style of the line polyline arc freestyle and polygon markup entities TASK 1 Select the markup line entity or entities for which you want to change the arrow style 2 From the Markup menu select Format and then select Arrow Style Select the new arrow style from the options provided RESULT The arrow style changes for the selected markup line entity or entities NOTE From the Markup Pr
163. ears in the Measurement dialog 7 Ifyou selected Entity Surface click the entity that you want to measure STEP RESULT The entity as well as all the faces belonging to the body are high lighted The measured surface of the body appears in the Measurement dialog 8 To measure the face surface of the entity click on the highlighted body STEP RESULT A list appears displaying the entity and its parents 167 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES WALKTHROUGH 9 Select the entity or a parent from the list ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To measure the face surface of a parent select the parent from the list STEP RESULT The selected entity is highlighted and the measured surface appears in the Measurement dialog 10 To take another measurement click Reset 11 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Walkthrough The Walkthrough feature in AutoVue provides an interactive visualization of 3D models File Edit View Manipulate Analysis Markup Collaborate Options Help OLS 223 DEM RS ot BO PT TETU Bookmarks g Model Layoutt Instructions Walk forward backward Left click and drag mouse up down or up down arrow key Turn left right Left click and drag mouse left right or left right arrow key More navigation options Press Ctrl Alt or Shift Move through walls C Restore last view V Show walkthrough dialog at startup fo House dwg AutoCAD 2007 2009
164. ect or deselect the entity type of a physical layer to affect its visibility separately from the other entities of the layer When you select a physical layer from the Physical Layers section the associated logical layers are also selected in the Logical Layers section You can also select individual logical layers from the Logical Layers section or press the Shift or Control key to select multiple logical layers NOTE One physical layer can be selected at a time The Logical Layers section displays a list of logical layers and the layer attribute options you can modify visibility order color and polarity To modify the attributes for both physical and logical layers first select the layers you want to modify and then use the settings to make the changes you want When you select physical layers and modify settings from the Layers dialog a message displays at the bottom of the dialog to indicate your last action When you are satisfied with the changes click Apply to make the changes in the workspace You can also create layer sets to save your modified layer settings to reuse them later When you open a file it displays all layer sets for that file You can choose the layer set you need or create your own ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 74 WORKING WITH EDA FILES LAYERS Changing the Order of Layers You can change the order in which layers display in the workspace Specifically you can change the z order of layer
165. ed 9 Click to complete the measurement STEP RESULT The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measurements for arc center coordinates radius diameter ratio arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Measurement Entities dialog 10 To move the value box click and drag it to anywhere on the markup 239 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES 11 To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement 12 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Calibrating an Arc TASK 1 Measure an arc in the drawing 2 From the Arc tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Radius Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance 3 From the Units list select a unit of measurement to which you want to calibrate the distance 4 Click Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate to a value Click Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate by a factor 6 Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration results appear in the Arc tab 7 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Creating EDA Markup Measure Entities When marking up EDA files in addition to all the markup options available for 2D files you can create markup measure entities The measure options in Ma
166. ed by a line The measured distance Delta X Delta Y and Delta Z appear in the Measurement dialog Additionally the coordinates for the center point of each entity displays in the From and To M fields To take another measurement click Reset Calibrating Distance Calibrate the distance measurement TASK 1 Measure distance between two points or measure cumulative distance 2 From the Distance tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Distance Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance 3 From the Units list select the unit to which you want to calibrate the distance 4 Select Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance to a value 5 Select Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance by a factor 6 Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration result appears in the Measurement dialog 7 Click Close to close the Distance tab ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 162 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MEASURING IN 3D FILES Measuring Minimum Distance With theMinimum Distanceoption you can measure the minimum distance between model parts as well as any two points from the selection sets vertices edges mid edges arc axes arc centers faces or any combination of entity types TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure OPTIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 2 Click the M
167. eeseesnsssssseeeeesressss 199 Saving a New Markup File sessssssssesssesssssssssseseesssssnssseeseesssessnsssssseossessosssssseessesrsrssnsssesstessrssnsssesseesees 199 Opening Markup FILES scssiecanssicescssassecassncossechves cacasssua ussesadessbvad ARA a RA ERa ES 200 Saving an Existing Markup File ssssssssssssesseessssssssseeseeeseessnsssssceeseessessssseooseeesssssnsssoseeessessnsssesseesres 200 iS OETA sek Markup Filen e vse ea a e s Ee EEA k 201 Exporting a Markup File esssssssessseesssssssseeeseesssssssssesseeeseesnsssesseeeseessssssssseeseeessesnssssesseeesessnsssssseeseeeressss 201 Setting the Active Markup File ssesssssssscssseesssssssssoeseeeseesssssssseecseessssssssseocresssossnsssesseessrssnsssssseesees 202 Changing the Active Markup File sessssssssssseesssssssssoeseeeseesssssesscecseesssssnssseeseeesossssssesseeessrssnsssesseesees 202 Working with Markup Layers ssssessessssssssssssesessessseseseoseeseeseeeeeseeeereereeesereeeeeeereereereereeresrssessessessessessssssssssss 203 Creating a Markup Layer ssessersersesserserseeserseeersresresresresssssessessessrssnsssssssssssssssensseseseneeneenesseesees terete 204 Setting the Active Markup Layer ccsssssscsscssccssecssscssscssesssccssessscssccsscssscesscesseessecsseeseessscssceeseeses 205 Changing the Color of a Markup Layer ssssessssssssessssssssossossoseesseseeseeseesceeeeeeeeeeeereereeesereereeeeeeeeeeee 205 Renaming a Mark p Layers coisa hi
168. eeseessssssssseeseeessesnssssessteesersnsssssseeereesrssss 127 Displaying the Perspective Projection of a 3D Model ssssssssssssssesesssssssssssessssssssssssssssssssssssse 127 Viewing a Model from a Particular View POInt se esssssssssssseecseessssssssseoseeessssssssosseeessesssssesseeeseee 128 Configuring SAY CS aceasta dec cea nsei aan esaia eo aaa ee etase Seo nse anA a ieai na 128 E tity PrOpertieS snina a RE aR ERN EENE R AEKA R R SEREEN ios 129 G neral AttribUteS nen saena aseitten ESEE Nn i i Eiss 129 Viewing Attribute Sranane rnia nsii aE E aia ieia Eni E Eia sa iare 130 Viewing Mass Properties ssssesssseessseessssecssssesssscesssceessceeessseeosseeoosseeossssossscossserosseerssceessseressseeesseees 130 Configuring Mass PrODEM IES 52s cnchunsetranenscanrcinwrndernsinmnddanmmanniaieniienntomratnnte 131 Viewing EXCONIES orinni a i ted alee A RAE RT SaS 132 AEA ALe OLA E EE T E AA EAN E E NN E AE E E E S 133 PMI Entiti eSa nen nssnomrinn anmannan ane a a eon n E a as 133 PMEFilterihig mnane n a a a E n RNN 134 Aligning to a PMI ENT Y ccccccsscdscscscsssocscnscoees tseclsceusscasenn seas actstoddscsctuusce telactubtanchcvssnacdlscsduschscanecteuesdons 134 G t a Displayed PMI Entity sonsa aa a ais 134 PMI Configuratio ENTITIES sionin innan ea a e e kh Ee 135 PMI AyperiNk Ssn E NAE A E A TEE 136 Manipulating a 3D Model ssssssssseesssssssssesseeesessssssesseecseesssssnsssosstessossnsssosseeesrrssesssssseceseeorossssseesreesr
169. el was saved In cases where there is no saved view AutoVue loads the isometric view of the model To return to the default view of a 3D model from the View menu select Default View Setting Standard or Camera Views Rather than entering Rotation mode you can view various predefined rotations with the Camera Views option from View and Markup modes To do so from the View menu select Camera Views and then select the pre defined view you want to display 125 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES 3D VIEWS The view options are Isometric Top Bottom Front Back Left and Right The model changes to the selected view You can also click the Views tab then click the view from the Standard Views tree or right click in the workspace and select Camera Views Setting Native Views AutoVue displays views for a 3D file as saved in its native application Native views are present only if the file contains saved views From the Viewmenu select Views and then select Native Views The model re orients to the selected view The view options vary depending on the file Examples of the view options are Last Saved View Presentation Front Back Left Right Top Bottom Isometric Trimetric and Dimetric You can also click the Views tab and then click the view from the Native Views tree or right click in the workspace and select Views and then select Native Views Creating a User Defined View You may want
170. en any two vertices edges mid edges arc centers faces or any combination of these entity types Minimum Distance Measure minimum distance between any two vertices edges mid edges arc centers faces or any combination of these entity types Edge Length Measure the precise length of a edge Face Surface Measure the precise surface area Vertex Coordinates Provide the coordinates of each vertex 3D Snapping Modes Snapping modes allow you to select or snap to different entity types on a model For example if you select Vertex all vertices are highlighted and a snap box appears when you move the cursor over a vertex Snapping modes allow you to snap to the following entities NOTE The behavior of snapping modes change in regards to the selected measurement option For example the behavior of arc center is not the same for distance and minimum distance 159 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES MEASURING IN 3D FILES Button Vertex S Description Highlights vertices on the model Behavior A snap box appears when you hover the mouse pointer over a vertex Edge Line Highlights edges onthe The edge is highlighted when you hover the Fs model mouse pointer NOTE When measuring Minimum Distance the finite edge is selected However when measuring Distance the infinite edge is selected Edge Middle Highlightsedgesonthe The edge is highlighted and a tooltip appears Q m
171. en from the Markup menu select Format and then select the property or properties you want to change ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the respective line property lists on the Markup Properties toolbar you can also modify the line style line thickness fill types and fill colors Right click outside the text area to complete the modification STEP RESULT The text appears on the drawing and in the Markup Navigation Tree To move the text box click and drag it to anywhere on the drawing To resize the text box select it and then click and drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To edit the text double click the text box in the tree or in the workspace Adding a Note You can attach longer comments as a markup sticky note on the drawing A note displays in the workspace as a standard size graphical symbol 3 Each note is labelled as Note lt n gt where n represents the numerical order of occur rence of the note for example the first note is labelled as Note1 To read the note double click the entity to open it or move the mouse over the entity to display the tooltip While editing a Note entity you can continue to make selections from the AutoVue toolbar and menubar Clicking in the workspace saves the last modified state of the Note and closes the Note dialog 263 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS When creating multiple Note entities it is possible to group the entities Onc
172. ength TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure Kel STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears displaying the measurement options 2 Click the Arc tab 3 Inthe Arc Info section select a unit of measurement from the Length Units list in which to measure the length of the arc 4 Inthe Measured Angle section select a unit of measurement from the Sweep Units list in which to measure the angle of the arc 5 Click points on the drawing to define the arc ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To take another measurement click Reset STEP RESULT The points are joined by an arc The measurements for center point coordinates radius diameter arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Arc tab 6 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Arcin Vector Files Use the Arc option to define an arc in the drawing and measure its radius center arc length start and end of angle sweep and diameter TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ot INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure im STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 2 Click the Arc tab 3 Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the arc between three points Snapping modes are displayed 57 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 2D FILES MEASURING IN 2D FILES 10 Click the snapping modes that you want to select as
173. entity in the tree select the entity and click Expand ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To view the entity properties for the previous entity click the back arrow _ lt _ To return to the entity properties displayed before you clicked the back arrow click the forward arrow _ gt __ Click OK to close the Entity Properties dialog Showing Net Connectivity You can view the net connectivity of an entity such as a pin via or trace with the Show Net Connectivity option Show Net Connectivity is disabled when more than one entity is selected TASK 1 Select an entity such as a pin via or trace from the workspace or the Navigation Panel STEP RESULT The corresponding entity is highlighted in the workspace and in the Navigation Panel 2 From the View menu select Show Net Connectivity ADDITIONAL NFORMATION From the workspace or Navigation Panel you can also right click the selected entity and then select Show Net Connectivity RESULT The graphical entities belonging to the connected nets are highlighted ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 70 WORKING WITH EDA FILES ENTITY PROPERTIES Displaying the Entity Properties of a Net You can view the properties of a net via the Show Entity Properties option The Show Entity Properties is disabled when more than one net entity is selected TASK 1 Select an entity such as a pin via or trace from the workspace or the Navigation Panel STEP RESULT The c
174. er or Face From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Minimum Distance 2 You cannot create a markup measure entity when measuring minimum distance Vertex Coordinates Provide the coordinates of each vertex From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Vertex Coordinates 22 3D Snapping Modes Snapping modes allow you to select or snap to different entity types on a model For example if you select Vertex all vertices are highlighted and a snap box appears when you move the cursor over a vertex Snapping modes allow you to snap to the following entities NOTE The behavior of snapping modes change in regards to the selected measurement option For example the behavior of arc center is not the same for distance and minimum distance Button Description Behavior Vertex S Highlights verticeson A snap box appears when you hover the mouse the model pointer over a vertex ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 254 MARKUPS 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Button Description Behavior Edge Line Highlights edgesonthe The edge is highlighted when you hover the model mouse pointer NOTE When measuring Minimum Distance the finite edge is selected However when measuring Distance the infinite edge is selected Edge Middle Highlightsedgesonthe The edge is highlighted and a tooltip appears Q model indicating the middle edge coordinate when you hover the mouse poi
175. erated for each markup You can sort the markups in the tree according to each property by clicking the column headers These properties are Property Description Markup Entity Type of markup entity created The name of the user who created the markup entity 195 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS FILTERING MARKUPS Property Description Last Modified The date and time the markup entity was last modified Page Page number of the original document on which the markup entity is created Layer Markup layer on which the markup entity is created When a markup entity is created it appears in the tree and the information is recorded and saved in the Markup file NOTE Hover your mouse over an entity to display its author and date properties Filtering Markups When viewing markups you have the option to filter the Markup files or enti ties that are displayed based on their metadata information To do so from the Markup menu select Filter and then select one of the following options By Author By Entity Types By Last Modified By Page and By Layer The Filter Markup Visibility dialog appears NOTE From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click Markup Filter To display markups created by a specific author click the Author tab and select the check box next to the author s name To remove an author s markup from the filter deselect the associated check box In the Markup Nav
176. esssssesse 136 Panning a Model Along the X Y and Z AXiS ssssssssssesseessssssssossceessessssssssseecseesssssssseoseeessssssssesse 137 Rotating a Model Along the X Y and Z AXIS sessesssssssssessssssessncsscsssssscssessssucsaccsssescssscseancencensess 137 Scaling a Model Along the X Y and Z AXiIS c ccssssesssessssscssessecssssssssecsncessssscssssaccsnceaceascescesseaeeens 138 Transforming a5 WIOCEl a canisaiennte tact aiana a E en an mane 139 Transforming a Model Using Illustration BUttONS cssssessessssssssssesssssecssscsccssscsessecseesnsensensess 140 Resetting the Transformation Of a 3D Model essessssssssssssessssssessncsscssscsscssscsecscsascssssseesseseeens 140 Transforming a Model by Setting Values sssssssssecssecssccssesseccseessscssecsuccesecssecssesseecsecensesseeeneess 141 SECRONING PEE E EEEE 142 Section Plane Opti NSS siinne n R ii A 142 LOU B ob 0 9 S aneao ae n ee e a ao atanan Erna NSO MONI ESRD NORE teii MT aesae doben iene A el 142 Defining the Section Plane and Cut through cssessscsssssesseessessecsscsscssscsesssssessscsssessseeeessesesens 143 40101 AO EEE AE E E E I E EEEE E re NTC 144 Explode Opti ON Se n a EE A S E E aaa 144 EXPLOSIONS Lyttle iat coed aes ales seen Aleem conta E 145 Saving an Exploded View of a 3D MOel cccscssssssssscsessscssssseesssssesssssncssssscssssacssncsaceasceecescsaeeees 145 Comparing 3D File Ssnan anea n E EE A E EA ERS 146 Comparing 3D File Sennen ainai
177. et the orientation of the watermark click Diagonal Horizontal or Vertical 7 To change the Font click Set Font The Font dialog appears a From the Font list select the type of font b From the Size list select the size of font 8 Inthe Print Properties dialog configure other print properties ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 290 PRINTING ASSIGNING PEN SETTINGS 9 Toviewa partial view of the file click Partial Preview STEP RESULT The Partial Preview dialog appears 10 Click OK to print RESULT The Print dialog appears indicating the document is printing Assigning Pen Settings From the Pen Settings tab of the Print Properties dialog you can set the thick ness of the color indices for the print file NOTE AutoVue uses the default pen color indices of the native document for the vector file being viewed You will not be able to change the color assigned to a pen with AutoVue TASK 1 From the File menu select Print ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Print STEP RESULT The Print Properties dialog appears 2 Click the Pen Settings tab 3 Under From To select the Color Index that you want to assign a new pen thickness ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To change more than one color indices press the Shift or Control key while selecting 4 From the Units list select the unit of measure that you want to set the thickness 5 Enter the new thickness STEP RESULT The
178. f100000 Pa 3 3 1721664 bytes May 3 2007 Models Views Bookmarks honean aeea In Walkthrough mode you can manipulate the view of a 3D model as if you are walking or flying through the model take measurements of the model and change the camera position and orientation For example when viewing a 3D model of house you can enter the front door and move between rooms and ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 168 WORKING WITH 3D FILES WALKTHROUGH floors All the while you have a 360 degree view of your surroundings and the ability to add markups Walkthrough Dialog To enter Walkthrough mode from the View menu select Walkthrough The Walkthrough dialog appears _ Walkthrough Instructions Walk forward backward Left click and drag mouse up down or up down arrow key Turn left right Left click and drag mouse left right or left right arrow key More navigation options Press Ctrl Alt or Shift Move through walls C Restore last view Show walkthrough dialog at startup NOTE Closing the Walkthrough dialog does not exit Walkthrough mode To exit you must deselect Walkthrough from the View menu The Instructions panel explains the possible model manipulation options while you perform the walkthrough See Walking Through a 3D Model for more information From the Speed panel of the Walkthrough dialog you can adjust the increment speed of the camera for all walkthr
179. for example a Box entity 2 From the workspace or Markup Tree select the Box entity ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 264 MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP ENTITIES 3 From the Markup menu select Note or Hyperlink ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Note or Hyperlink Ye RESULT In the Markup Tree the selected markup entity appears as a child of the Box parent entity Working with Markup Entities With AutoVue you can assign a markup entity its own color the same color as the current active layer or a custom color You also have the option of grouping markup entities When you group markup entities you can manage the group as you would a single entity In Markup mode there are several options for modifying an entity You can apply these options to selected pre existing entities or to new entities that you add NOTE You can edit certain markup entities after they have been created To do so in the Markup Navigation Tree right click the markup entity and then select Edit Go To a Markup Entity The Go To feature restores the view state to when an entity was first created Opening an existing Markup file also restores the last saved view state From the Markup Navigation Tree right click the markup entity that you want to view and select Go To NOTE Double clicking on a markup entity from the Markup Navigation tree also has the same result as the Go To feature
180. fway point of a linear component Center point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near the center of an elliptical component x Free snap Allow snapping at any point on the drawing NOTE When selecting a snapping mode you also have the option to select all snapping modes All On or to turn off snapping modes All Off The below table lists snapping locations for certain measurements ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 234 MARKUPS CREATING 2D VECTOR MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES Measurement Snapping Location Area Snaps to a shape on the drawing Arc Snaps to an arc on the drawing Angle Snap to two non parallel lines Measuring Distance Use the Distanceoption to measure the distance between two specific points TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Distance ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Measurement Entities dialog appears From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance 2 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring 3 To select all snapping modes click All On To clear all snapping modes click All Off 4 Fromthe Measured Distance Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance 5 Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point 6 Click another point on the drawing to define the end point ADDITIONAL INFORMAT
181. g air gaps allowed between two sets of entities in the design These sets can belong to the same type of entity or to different types Electrical Targets certain properties of the nets Manufacturing Targets the physical properties of a particular entity Design Rule Checks For design rule checks that have values you can set the global unit of measure ment The available design rule checks are Type Clearance Design Rule Check Description Minimum Specify the Clearance minimum distance Pad gt Pad between the pad outline and the outline of its drill hole on all physical layers The two outlines geometries are part of the pin pad entity but on different logical layers ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 90 WORKING WITH EDA FILES DESIGN VERIFICATION Type Design Rule Check Minimum Clearance Pad gt Trace Description Specify the minimum pad to trace clearance and pads on the same physical layer Only the pad outline is considered Does not take into account traces connected to a pin pad on the same net Minimum Clearance Trace gt Trace Specify the minimum trace to trace clearance on the same physical layer Does not take into account directly connected traces Minimum Clearance Component gt Component Specify the minimum component to component clearance on the same physical layer co
182. g points on the drawing to define the region you want to measure STEP RESULT Each point is joined by a line The area and perimeter measure ments appear in their respective fields in the Area tab Right click to complete the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Area in Vector Files Use the Area option to measure the area and perimeter of a region TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure on INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure load STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears Click the Area tab Select Between Points if you want to measure the area between points on a drawing ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Snapping modes are displayed Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring See 2D Vector Snapping Modes for more information Option Descriptions AllOn Select all snapping modes All Off Clear all snapping modes Select Shape if you want to measure the area of a predefined shape on the drawing From the Measured Area Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the area From the Perimeter Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the perimeter To cumulate a Net Area Result of different areas click Add To subtract an area from the Net Area Result click Subtract ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Select Clear to clear the
183. gative polarity is selected the layer image is inverted the enti ties in the layer are displayed as transparent and the remainder of the layer appears as a solid color Changing Layer Color You can modify the color of any physical or logical layer from the Layers dialog TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Layers STEP RESULT The Layers dialog opens If necessary click Expand to open the Logical Layers section ADDITIONALINFORMATION Select the layer or layers for which you want to change the color You can select a physical layer from the Physical Layers section logical layers associated with the selected physical layer are also selected You can also select individual logical layers from the Logical Layers section or press the Shift or Control key while selecting to select multiple layers After you select a layer you can do one of the following to modify its color Click Modify Color o and then select a color from the palette Use this button if you want to change the color of all logical layers associated with a selected physical layer or to change the color of many selected logical layers at the same time Double click a square in the Color column o of the Logical Layers section and then select a color from the palette Use this option to change the color of individual logical layers
184. ges the markup entity color to the color of the layer Defining a Custom Color To define your own color take the following steps TASK 1 From the Fill Color list select Custom Color STEP RESULT The Color dialog appears 2 Select a color and click OK STEP RESULT The fill color changes for the selected markup entity or entities 3 Click OK to close the Markup Entity Properties dialog RESULT The fill type changes for the selected markup entity or entities 279 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES NOTE Any new markup entities that you create will have the new fill color Markup Layers You can move selected markup entities to a specific layer the markup entities will inherit the properties of the layer TASK 1 From the Markup Layer list select the layer you want to make active 2 Click OK to close the Markup Entity Properties dialog RESULT The selected layer appears in the workspace See Setting the Active Markup Layer Leader Alignment With the Leader markup entity you can adjust the location of the leader line s anchor point to the text box The Leader Alignment list has the following option for anchor point location with respect to the text box Top Left Top Center Top Right Center Left Center Center Right Bottom Left Bottom Center and Bottom Right Text Box Visibility You can choose to hide the surrounding box for t
185. hat remains after a hole has been drilled through the pad of a printed circuit board Anti copper An area within a fill zone in which copper cannot be placed Aperture An opening similar to the aperture of a camera that is used for photo plotting Apertures are available in various sizes and shapes Aperture list A text file containing the dimensions for each of the apertures used to photo plot PCB artwork Clusters Components that are grouped according to their interrelationships and placed in close proximity on the board This keeps the connections on the PCB short so that the board is easier to work with Component An element or a part of a PCB Component density The quantity of components on a unit area of a PCB Component hole A hole in the printed circuit board that corresponds to a pin or wire of a component This hole serves the dual function of attaching the component to the board and establishing the electrical connection between the pin or wire and the remainder of the board circuitry ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 302 APPENDIX A EDA TERMS AND DEFINITIONS EDA Term Definition Component library A computer data file that contains the footprint patterns for a number of components Component side The uppermost or top layer of a board on which most components are placed Component silkscreen The silkscreen markings of the printed circuit
186. he DMS column reflects the value read during Stamp creation It does not reflect the current value in the DMS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION After a change is made to a value cell you must press Tab or Enter to finalize the changes 3 To commit changes to values for backend system attributes click Commit Changes 4 Toreset changes and revert to backend system values click Reset When you are done modifying the attributes click OK to finalize your changes and to close the DMS Attributes dialog RESULT The Stamp is updated to reflect any changes you made Creating 2D Vector Markup Measure Entities When marking up 2D vector files in addition to all the markup options avail able for 2D files you can create markup measure entities The measure options in Markup mode work slightly different than in View mode Measure options vary between vector and non vector files For vector files AutoVue provides the option to snap to fixed points on the drawing For non vector files you can only free snap When measuring in Markup mode the specified measurement lines and values are displayed on the current active markup layer as entities These entities can be moved resized hidden or deleted You can also modify the font of a measure entity align a free snap measure entity to the horizontal or vertical axis as well as add units of measure and symbols to a measurement and have them appear on the drawing NOTE When you
187. he Leader Text and 3D Text markup entities ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 280 Markups FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES 281 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL Printing With AutoVue you can print and preview files Files can be printed on their own or with associated markups and overlays You can also choose which markup layers to make visible so that they can print With the Batch Print option you can senda list of files to print at the same time When printing a file there are print properties that you can define From the File menu select Print to display the following properties Option Print Description Define the print options See Print Options Margins Define the margin settings See Print Margins Headers Footers Define the headers footers to be included on every page printed See Header Footer Watermark Define the watermark to be included on every page printed See Watermarks Pen Settings Change the thickness assigned to a pen See Assigning Pen Settings Print Options With the Options tab you can define print options for the printed file The options are ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 282 PRINTING PRINT OPTIONS Print Dialog Section Printer Option Modify Description Select a printer and configure print properties such as paper size number of copies and so on Paper size Display
188. he Stamp is only available if a system administrator has defined and configured the Stamp A Stamp can retrieve a document s attributes directly from the backend system They can also update attributes from the Stamp to the document in the backend system Backend system attributes that the Stamp can read and write to can be simple values or a list of values When lists are constrained you can only select from the pre defined list When lists are non constrained you can enter a value that is not in the drop down list When an attribute is a multi valued attribute AutoVue lets you select multiple values from the drop down list In this case values are separated by a semi colon As of AutoVue 20 2 Stamps are disabled for 3D files Existing stamps that were defined in previous releases of AutoVue can still be viewed but cannot be modi fied Adding a Stamp To add a Stamp markup entity to a document do the following TASK 1 Enter Markup mode 2 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Stamp ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Stamp 2 STEP RESULT The Stamp dialog appears 3 From the Choose Stamp box select the desired Stamp and then click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If the Enable Resizing check box is selected then the Stamp can be resized in the workspace If the check box is grayed out then the Stamp is not resizable and has a set size ORACLE AU
189. he model from the Manipulate menu select Transform and then select Reset Selected To restore the default state for the whole model select Reset All Resetting the Transformation of a 3D Model You can reset a model or selected parts to their original transformation TASK 1 2 View the transformed 3D Model To reset the entire model to its original transformation from the Manipulate menu select Transform and then select Reset All ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 140 WORKING WITH 3D FILES TRANSFORMING A 3D MODEL To reset selected model parts to their original transformation from the Manipulate menu select Transform and then select Reset Selected ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also reset selected model parts To do so from the Model Tree deselect the check box beside the parts in the Transfor mation column w RESULT The model or selected parts are reverted back to their original transformation Transforming a Model by Setting Values TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Transform and then select Define ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also select Trans form STEP RESULT The Transformation dialog appears 2 Select the model part or parts that you want to rotate translate or scale ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one model part press the Shift or Control key while selecting To rotate the model by set values enter the X Y and Z
190. hiding 115 XRefs 114 Models tab 23 108 PMI entities 133 recentering 112 113 entity reference 112 render modes 119 120 sectioning 142 cut options 142 options 142 section plane 143 selecting model parts 111 text markup 262 transformation 139 buttons 140 reset 140 setting values 141 Views tab 24 109 3D dynamic rendering 179 3D Model Tree 23 108 3D rendering 179 3D views 125 camera view 125 default view 125 layers 128 native views 126 perspective 127 user defined view 126 delete 127 view points 128 A About dialog version and buid information 16 archive files 30 arrow style 278 AutoVue 14 basics 16 graphical user interface 17 GUI menu bar 18 313 toolbars 18 AutoVue GUI AutoVue properties toolbar 18 AutoVue toolbar 18 Markup entity toolbar 18 AutoVue properties toolbar 18 AutoVue toolbar 18 base font 177 batch print 282 Bill of Material BOM 88 Bookmarks tab 21 65 110 build information 16 bylayer 274 C calibrating arc 58 106 165 229 240 248 260 calibrating distance 53 101 162 226 236 244 257 change color markup layer 205 Components tab 21 62 configure 172 2D 177 colors 178 snap settings 178 3D 179 align with current UCS 185 background 184 background gradient 184 background images 184 color 182 dynamic load mesh resolution 181 dynamic rendering 179 frame rate 180 geometry highlight 183 initial visibility 181 loading 181 miscellaneous 185 model 180 PMI filtering 18
191. ialog 12 To move the value box click and drag it to anywhere on the drawing 13 To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement 14 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog 247 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES Calibrating an Arc TASK 1 2 Measure an arc in the drawing From the Arc tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Radius Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance From the Units list select a unit of measurement to which you want to calibrate the distance Click Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate to a value Click Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate by a factor Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration results appear in the Arc tab Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Measuring Minimum Distance Use theMinimum Distance option to measure the minimum distance between entities The available entities for snapping are nets pins vias and traces To measure the minimum distance between entities on separate layers select Across Layers If a physical layer does not exist this option determines whether or not the minimum distance should be calculated across logical layers TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Minimum Distance
192. ialog and then click Toggle to hide display the layer Click OK to close the dialog and to apply your changes Selecting Blocks Use this option to select a block to display from the current active file TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Blocks ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Blocks STEP RESULT The Select a Block to Display dialog appears listing the blocks for the current active file From the list select the block that you want to display Click OK STEP RESULT The selected block is displayed Displaying XRefs AutoVue references various sources to obtain all the data required to completely and correctly display files These sources can be internal to the file like layers and blocks External reference files XRefs are located outside the file Use the XRefs option to display the external references of the current active file TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select XRefs STEP RESULT The Select the External References to Display dialog appears listing the external reference files associated with the current active file 39 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES 2 You can modify the visibility of the XRefs by doing one of the following Deselect select the Status check box beside the XRef that you want to hide display Cl
193. ible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third party content products and services Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss costs or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third party content products or services January 2015 Contents PYG ACS as sczsslcuncn canna feces jevcsesen hisser istisini ee asa a ai aaan E 12 ETO 10E EEEE AE E AE 12 PAEL U Dlou aa ETALE AEEA E A N E E E AA A 12 EALA A EOE E E AE E E EE ASEE OEE E EAEE 13 Fey Agere alto e a N T NANS 14 Oracle AUtoVU ennonn nanni Re e a n a Ra S E ae E AEA 14 Marking Up DO CUS NICS anren aen de E E tea a s ashe Aia ate ESS 15 PRUIE ON UIC BASICS AEEA E E EEEE 16 AutoVue Version Information sssssesssesseseeeeeeeeerserserserseeseeseeeeeeeeerseeserseeseeseessesstssessnssssssessssnensens eneses ees 16 Viewing Version and Build Information cccsssssessscsssssecsesssessssncessssssssesssesessseacsssceacesseseesnsesees 16 AutoVue Graphical User Interface sesessssssssssssessessncssssssssessssssessncssssssssscsssssscsusssssscescessssecsusescancesseses 17 Men Balendinen ved man aAA ERAN R sn EA RENAE ER E E RE RE 18 KOO I AVS EA EEEE EA EER AEA 18 Navigation Panelas r ea a aa AiE E TSE nei NE NS 19 Markup Navigation Trf e ssssssssssseessssssssssseecseessssssssseeseesssssssssessteesressssssessteeeressossssssesrressessssssesseresesss 25 SUALUS Ball E SE TE E EEE 25 Quick IN SITUS
194. ically on a computer from a properly prepared schematic Obstacle An outline representing an object on the board It must be taken into account during routing placement or copper pour Pad On a PCB a copper shape on one or more layers there may be a hole and an isolation surrounding the copper used for connecting a component pin to the PCB The pad indicates where pins of a component are placed Padstack A numbered list of pad descriptions Each description contains a pad definition including layer style drill diameter size offset and solder mask guard width 305 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL APPENDIX A EDA TERMS AND DEFINITIONS EDA Term PCB Printed Circuit Board Definition A PCB is a board made up of components affixed to a common surface and connected by copper tracks Pin The portion of a component to which an electrical connection can be made Polarity Positive polarity refers to visible items Negative polarity refers to items that become transparent to reveal underlaying layers or background color Ratsnest A number of unrouted straight line connections between two or more pads that represent the electrical connections in the netlist The ratsnest serves as a reminder that the pads must be connected and that currently there is no track on the board to make that connection Reference designator A character string denoting the t
195. ick All On to display all the XRefs or click All Off to hide all the XRefs Select a XRef from the dialog and then click Toggle to hide display the XRef ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Raster XRefs cannot be toggled on off for AutoCAD and MicroStation drawings 3 Click OK to close the Select the External References to Display dialog RESULT The selected XRefs are displayed Displaying Details About Resources Resource information for a file is displayed in the left of the AutoVue status bar Ifa file is missing resources the Missing Resource icon appears to the left of the AutoVue status bar These missing resources can be XRefs text fonts linestyles or shape files If a missing resource has been substituted for another resource NOTE In order to correctly display a file you must make sure all required resources are provided to AutoVue See Viewing Missing XRef Notification Icon for information on missing XRefs TASK 1 Click the Missing Resource icon or the Substituted Resource icon ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the File menu you can also select Properties STEP RESULT The Properties dialog appears 2 Click the Resource Informationtab to display details about missing or substituted resource information required to properly display this file ADDITIONAL INFORMATION A green check mark indicates the resources that AutoVue is able to access A red 3 indicates that resources are not accessible substituted for
196. ide of the Entity Properties dialog a tree displays all the entities associated with the entity you selected The entity you selected is the root of the tree and all the associated entities grouped by their type are shown as its chil dren The attributes of the entity display to the right of the tree under Entity Info In the tree select any associated entity to display its attributes under Entity Info You can also view entity attributes in the workspace When you hover the mouse over an entity in the workspace a tooltip with commonly used entity information appears You can turn these tooltips off or on from the Configura tion dialog See Configuring AutoVue for more information on the Configuration dialog 69 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES ENTITY PROPERTIES Viewing the Properties of an Entity The Entity Properties dialog displays detailed information about any selected entity in the current schematic drawing or PCB design TASK 1 Select the entity in the workspace or from the Navigation Panel or Entity Search dialog Right click and select Show Entity Properties ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also double click the entity in the workspace to view its entity information STEP RESULT The Entity Properties dialog displays the selected entity and its associated entity Select any associated entity in the tree to display its attributes To view all associated entities for any given
197. ies dialog configure other print properties To view a partial view of the file click Partial Preview STEP RESULT The Partial Preview dialog appears Click OK to print RESULT The Print dialog appears indicating the document is printing You can choose to include predefined headers and footers when printing an Excel file from AutoVue TASK 1 From the Print Properties dialog click the Headers Footers tab ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 288 PRINTING WATERMARKS 2 Under Headers and Footers click inside the Left Center and Right boxes corresponding to the header or footer position in the original file Select F Native Print Settings Excel from the Insert Code list 4 Click OK to print RESULT The Excel file s headers and footers are printed Watermarks From the Watermark tab of the Print Properties dialog you can specify a water mark that will appear on a printed file When printing a watermark it appears transparent on the file contents You can choose a diagonal horizontal or vertical orientation for the watermark In addition to entering text you can e set the type size and style of font insert Watermark information print system variables To insert Watermark information AutoVue provides a list of codes that you can choose from These codes are f Full path of document v Document Drive e d Document Directory b Document Base name e Docu
198. igation Tree a filter icon appears in the Author column header e To display markups by entity type click the Markup Entity tab and select the check box next to the markup entity or entities To remove a markup entity from the filter deselect the associated check box In the Markup Navigation Tree a filter icon appears in the Markup Entity column header To display markups based on when they were last modified click the Last Modified tab From the list select one of the following options Option Description Anytime Displays all markup entities ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 196 MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP FILES Option Description Before Displays all markup entities modified before the selected date After Displays all markup entities modified after the selected date On Displays all markup entities modified on the selected date Between Displays all markup entities modified between the selected dates In the Markup Navigation Tree a filter icon appears in the Last Modified column header To display markups by page location click the Page tab and select one of the following Option Description All pages Displays markup entities on all the pages Current page Displays markup entities on the currently selected page Page range Displays the markup entities on the selected page range To display markups by layers click the Layer tab and selec
199. ight click From the AutoVue toolbar Mh you can also click _ NOTE The Rotate option is disabled for archived files text based documents and spreadsheets 35 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 2D FILES 2D VIEWING OPTIONS Menu Sub Menu Description Rotate Rotate Clockwise Rotate the file 90 degrees clockwise From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click 60 Rotate Counter Clockwise Rotate the file 90 degrees counter clockwise From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click 90 Using the Pan and Zoom Window The Pan and Zoom Window view option allows a close up view of a particular area of a file while maintaining a full view of the file The Pan and Zoom Window displays a miniature version of the file and has a movable box frame on top of the miniature to indicate the area of the file displayed in the Auto Vue workspace NOTE The Pan and Zoom Window option is disabled for text based documents and spreadsheets TASK 1 From the View menu select Pan and Zoom Window ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Pan and Zoom Window STEP RESULT The Pan and Zoom window appears displaying a full view of the file 2 From the Options menu select Dynamic to view the changes in real time 3 To view a close up of a specific area of the file in the AutoVue work space minimize the frame box by clicking and dragging the frame han
200. ight click and select Show Entity Properties STEP RESULT The Entity Properties dialog appears Click the Attributes tab STEP RESULT The attributes of the selected model parts are displayed in a hier archical tree Click Close to close the Entity Properties dialog Viewing Mass Properties The Mass Properties tab displays the precise measurements for mass volume area center of gravity moments of inertia and inertia tensor for any model or selection TASK 1 Select the part or parts for which you want to calculate the mass prop erties To select multiple parts press the Shift or Control key while selecting To view the mass properties of the entire 3D model make sure no parts are selected ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also make your selection after you open theEntity Properties dialog ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 130 WORKING WITH 3D FILES ENTITY PROPERTIES 3 From the Analysis menu select Show Entity Properties ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click in the workspace and select Show Entity Properties or in the Model Tree select the model part or parts then right click and select Show Entity Properties STEP RESULT The Entity Properties dialog appears 4 Click the Mass Properties tab to view the properties of the selected mass STEP RESULT When amass property cannot be calculated N A displays in red for that property When this is the case you can also click
201. in Distance tab Click M Set 1 4 From the Snapping Mode section select one of the following Select Entity if you want to measure the distance between model parts Snapping modes are disabled Select Geometry if you want to measure the distance between entity types Snapping modes are enabled 5 Ifyou selected Entity select a part or parts on the model If you selected Geometry select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To reset a set click Clear To clear items from a set select the items and press the Delete key To deselect a part or entity type on the model press the Control key and left click the part or entity type STEP RESULT The model parts appear in the list under Set 1 and are highlighted on the model and in the Model Tree All entities of the selected entity type are highlighted on the model 6 Click BY Set 2 7 Repeat step 5 STEP RESULT The model part appears in the list under Set 2 8 From the Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance 9 Click Compute STEP RESULT The minimum distance from the first set of entities to the second set is highlighted by a line The measured minimum distance X Y and Z coor dinates for Position 1 and X Y and Z coordinates for Position 2 appear in the Measurement dialog 10 Totake another measurement click Reset 11 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog 163 ORACLE AUTOVUE US
202. in the Measurement Entities dialog 7 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Calibrating Distance Calibrate the distance measurement TASK 1 Measure distance between two points or measure cumulative distance 2 From the Distance tab click Calibrate STEPRESULT The Distance Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance 3 From the Units list select the unit to which you want to calibrate the distance 4 Select Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance to a value 5 Select Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance by a factor ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 226 MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS 6 Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration result appears in the Measurement dialog 7 Click Close to close the Distance tab Measuring Area Use the Area option to measure the area and perimeter of a region TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Area ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Area 2 STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 From the Measured Area Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the area 3 From the Perimeter Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the perimeter To cumulate a Net Area Result of different areas select Add To subtract an area from the Net Area
203. ion NOTE The Compare feature performs a graphical comparison not a geometrical comparison The comparison results are displayed in different colors to differentiate the results of the file comparison The comparison options and corresponding colors are Option Color Description View Additions Green Displays data that is present in the newer file but not in the older file View Deletions Red Displays data that is missing in the newer file but present in the older file View Unchanged Blue Indicates that there is no change between the newer file and old file TASK 1 View the newer file in AutoVue 2 From the Analysis menu select Compare STEP RESULT The File Open dialog appears 3 Enter the file name or browse to select the file that you want to compare with the newer file 4 Click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you apply a change from the View menu all three windows display the synchronized change STEP RESULT AutoVue displays three windows the first displaying the newer file the second displaying the older file and the third displaying the compar ison results 5 To access the Compare options right click in any of the windows ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To maximize any of the windows click the O button on the title bar of the window that you want to maximize To minimize click the button To restore the window click the E button STEP RESULT A menu appears displaying th
204. ion click and drag the Plane Position slider to the position you want 5 Select Dynamic if you want the plane to move simultaneously with the slider 6 Select Show Plane if you want the section plane visible 7 Select Fill if you want the section plane filled ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The fill color can also be set from the Configuration dialog STEP RESULT The section plane is displayed as filled and the Section Area is calculated 8 From the Measured Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the section surface 9 Click Close to close the Define Section dialog ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Once you have defined the section plane and closed the Define Section dialog among other options you can choose whether to enable remove or invert a defined section from the Section menu 143 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES EXPLODING Exploding You can use the Explode option to better understand the structure of an assembly and to analyze the dismount capability You can also save the exploded view as well as obtain a printed document of the exploded product for further analysis Explode Options From the Explode dialog you can define how the explosion is to be performed and to visually explode or implode a model The options that you can set are Option Maximum Depth Description Define up to which level you want to explode All entities from the root level to th
205. ion is only available for PCB files EDA Snapping Modes The snapping modes allow you to click to precise geometrical or electrical points For example when you select Snap to Pin move the cursor over the pin you want to select until the pin is highlighted then click Highlight and click a second pin to measure the distance between them 99 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES MEASURING IN EDA FILES The snapping modes allow you to snap to the middle center and end points of an entity as well as a pin via and symbol The following table outlines the avail able snapping modes Button Snap To Description a End point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near the entity s end point N Mid point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near the halfway point of a linear entity Center point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near the center of an entity l Pin Electrical snap mode where a snap box appears when the cursor touches a pin Via Electrical snap mode where a snap box appears when the cursor touches a via Leo Symbol origin Electrical snap mode where a snap box appears when the cursor touches a component Free snap Allows snapping at any point on the drawing Dx Net Allows snapping to a net FA Trace Allows snapping to a trace
206. ion to select all snapping modes All On or to turn off snapping modes All Off The below table lists snapping locations for certain measurements Measurement Snapping Location Area Snaps to a shape on the drawing Arc Snaps to an arc on the drawing Angle Snap to two non parallel lines Distance in non Vector Files Use the Distance option to measure the distance between two specific points TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure Koad STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears displaying the measurement options Click the Distance tab In the Measure Distance Units list select a unit of measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you want to measure the distance along a path select the Cumulative check box 51 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 2D FILES MEASURING IN 2D FILES 4 Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point Click another point on the drawing to define the end point ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you selected Cumulative continue clicking points along the path that you want to measure 6 Right click to complete the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement STEP RESULT The points are joined by a line The measured distance Delta X and Delta Y appear in their respective fields in Distance tab 7 Click Close to close the Meas
207. ions are displayed at their current values 3 Click Apply STEP RESULT The align and scale modifications are applied to the file in the second window Click OK to the close the Align and Scale dialog ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 46 WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES Drawing Information The Drawing Information option is only available with AutoCAD and MicroS tation drawings and is accessed from the Analysis menu The Drawing Infor mation options available are Select Single Entity List Tags Attributes and Entity Information Viewing Details of a Single Entity The Select Single Entity option allows you to view information of a single entity TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Show Drawing Information and then select Select Single Entity 2 Click the entity for which you want to view information 3 Ifyou did not select an entity a message appears informing you that no entities were found and prompts you to select again 4 The Get Entity Info dialog appears displaying the information for the selected entity The Extended Data XData button appears if additional information exists for that entity Click XData to view the information 5 Click OK to close the Get Entity Info dialog Viewing Tags Attributes The List Tag Attributes option allows you to view information on block attri butes and tags TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Show Drawing Information
208. ities Creating 3D Markup Measure Entities When marking up 3D files you can create markup measure entities The measure options in Markup mode work slightly different than in View mode When measuring in Markup mode the specified measurement lines and values are displayed on the current active markup layer as entities These entities can be moved resized or deleted NOTE Ifyou manipulate a part of a model the measure entity values do not update accordingly AutoVue provides the option to snap to different entity types on the model In Markup mode you can choose from several measurement options to create markup measure entities From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Measurement to access the following measure options 253 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Name Angle Description Measure the precise angle between three vertices or any two edges planes or faces From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Angle 2 Arc Measure the precise radius length and angle of any arc and calculate the center point location From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Arc a Distance Measure the precise distance between any two Vertex Edge Midedge Arc Center or Face From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance a Minimum Distance Measure minimum distance between any two Vertex Edge Midedge Arc Cent
209. ities dialog 9 Click and drag the value box anywhere on the markup 10 To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement 11 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Measuring Vertex Coordinates The Vertex Coordinates option provides the coordinates of vertices on the model TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity Measurement and then Vertex Coordinate ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Vertex Coordinate xyz STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears All vertices on the model are highlighted 261 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Adding Text Scroll over the vertex whose coordinates you want to add to the markup STEP RESULT The X Y and Z coordinates appear in a tooltip Click the vertex STEP RESULT The X Y an Z coordinates and unit appear a value box entity on the current active markup layer and in the Measurement Entities dialog Click and drag the value box anywhere on the markup ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement STEP RESULT Click and drag the frame handles to enlarge the value box To remove the highlighted vertices on the model click Close in the Measurement Entities dialog With AutoVue you can add a 3D text box entity to a markup TASK 1 From the Marku
210. k Net N you cannot select any other type of entity See EDA Snapping Modes 6 Click the first set of entities on the drawing ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To clear the last set of entities you selected click Clear Set STEP RESULT The entities are highlighted 7 Select Second Set EY to select the entities that you want to measure to ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 102 WORKING WITH EDA FILES MEASURING IN EDA FILES Measuring Area 8 Click the second set of entities on the drawing STEP RESULT The entities are highlighted in a different color 9 From the Measured Min Distance Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance 10 Select Zoom to Result if you want to zoom into the measurement on the drawing 11 Click Compute ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AutoVue does not measure the distance between layers z dimension STEP RESULT The minimum distance from the first set of entities to the second set is represented by a line The minimum measured distance Delta X Delta Y and the Manhattan Distance appear in the Measure Min Distance section of the dialog 12 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Use the Area option to measure the area and perimeter of a region TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ATONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure ia STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 2 Click the Area tab 3 Select Between
211. k New STEP RESULT The New Markup Layer dialog appears Enter a name for the markup layer 4 Click OK STEP RESULT The new markup layer is added to the list in the Markup Layers dialog 5 To change the color of the new layer click Color STEP RESULT The Layer Color dialog appears The default layer color is red 6 Select a color andclick OK Click OK to close the Markup Layers dialog ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 204 MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP LAYERS Setting the Active Markup Layer A markup can have several layers and you can set a layer as the active markup layer When a markup layer is active all modifications you make are applied to that markup layer There are two ways in which to set a layer as active TASK 1 From the Markupmenu select Markup Layers STEP RESULT The Markup Layers dialog appears 2 You can perform one of the following From the Markup Layers list select the layer you want to make active and click Set Active From the Currently Active Layer list select the layer you want to make active 3 Click OK Changing the Color of a Markup Layer After you create a markup layer you have the option to change the color of its markup entities TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Markup Layers The Markup Layers dialog appears 2 From the Markup Layers list select the markup layer whose color you want to change 3 Click Color STEP RESULT The Layer Color dialog a
212. k OK to close the View Point dialog RESULT The entity moves to the defined view point The Global axes and the User Coordinates System change position to reflect the view point Configuring Layers Use this option to configure which layers to display from the current active file TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers STEP RESULT The Select the Layers to Display dialog appears and lists the layers and layer visibility for the current active file To sort the list of layers in the dialog click the Name column header to sort alphabetically or numerically or click the Status column header to group by visibility Select the check box beside the layers that you want to display ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 128 WORKING WITH 3D FILES ENTITY PROPERTIES 4 Deselect the check box beside the layers that you want to hide 5 Click OK to close the Select the Layers to Display dialog RESULT The selected layers are displayed Entity Properties You can view properties such as visibility color transparency mass properties and extents of a model or model parts General Attributes The Attributes tab displays a model or model part s attributes The list of attri butes varies depending on the model Some of the viewable General attributes are as follows Attribute Description Color Color of the selected model part Density The density of the model or selecte
213. last modified Page Page number of the original document on which the markup entity is created Layer Markup layer on which the markup entity is created When a markup entity is created it appears in the tree and the information is recorded and saved in the Markup file NOTE Hover your mouse over an entity to display its author and date properties When in View mode or Markup mode the status bar is located at the bottom of the main window The fields displayed from left to right on the status bar are marker current active filename file type zoom factor current page and total 25 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL AUTOVUE BASICS OPENING FILES number of pages current active file size file creation date and cursor s coordi nate position The following image shows the status bar gt x acadi2 dwg Quick Menus AutoCAD Version 12 65 Pg2 2 B8449bytes Jun 14 2004 1 313 6 216 There are three markers that may be present on the status bar the Markup Indi cator icon indicates associated markups the Missing Resource icon indi substituted resources The Markup Indicator indicates that the current active file has associated markups While in View mode click the Markup Indicator icon to view the Markup Files dialog then select a Markup file or group of Markup files to open The Missing Resource icon indicates that some main resources required to properly display the current active file are not
214. lbar you can set the active markup by selecting a markup from the list on the Markup Properties toolbar ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 202 MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP LAYERS e Take the following steps From the Markup menu select Set Active The Set Active Markup dialog appears From the Select Active Markup list select the markup you want to make active Click OK to make the selected Markup file active Working with Markup Layers Markup files can be divided into layers with each layer having its own unique name You can create name and color layers to organize your work For example different colors can indicate time priorities and each layer can contain markups with a common purpose When working with markup layers you can view layers individually or in combination add rename or delete layers You can also specify a different color for each layer NOTE The default layer color is red See also Moving a Markup Entity to Another Layer 203 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP LAYERS Creating a Markup Layer From the Markup Layers dialog you can create a markup layer TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Markup Layers STEP RESULT The Markup Layers dialog appears Markup Layers Markup Layers Markup N LayerName COLOR acad2006 002 0 Red acad2006 001 0 Red Untitled4 lo Red UntitledS lo Red Currently Active Layer lo 2 Clic
215. le and in the older file select the modified or moved amp entity from the tree then right click and select Entity 1 Properties STEP RESULT The Entity Properties dialog appears displaying the properties of the entity in the base file 147 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES COMPARING 3D FILES 6 Select the entity again then right click and select Entity 2 Properties STEP RESULT The Entity Properties dialog appears displaying the properties of the entity in the compare file 7 To compare the results of the entity in the newer file to the older file select the entity from tree then right click and select Compare Results STEP RESULT The Compare Results dialog appears To view the attribute differences click Attributes To view the transformation difference click Transformation ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If there are no attribute or transformation differences the buttons are disabled 10 Click OK to close the Compare Results dialog 11 To exit Compare mode from the File menu select Exit Compare ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also select Exit Comparex RESULT The newer file appears in the workspace Comparing Entity Sets From the file comparison you can compare a set of entities from one file against a set of entities from the another file You can also compare sets of entities from the same file TASK 1 Select the files you want to compa
216. lect it and then click and drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Adding Text With AutoVue you can add a text box entity to a markup TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Text ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Text Al Click and drag on the drawing to define the dimensions of the text box Click in the text box and enter the text you want to add ADDITIONALINFORMATION The height of the text box will adjust to accommodate the text 249 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS ADDING TEXT 4 To change text box font properties from the Markup menu select Format and then select Font ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the respective font property lists on the Markup Properties toolbar you can also modify the font type style and size STEP RESULT The Font dialog appears allowing you to change the font type style and size Click OKto implement the font changes and to close the Font dialog 6 To change the line properties or fill color of the text box select the text box then from the Markup menu select Format and then select the property or properties you want to change ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the respective line property lists on the Markup Properties toolbar you can also modify the line style line thickness fill types
217. lect the markup entity that you want to delete To select multiple markup entities press the Shift or Control keys while selecting 2 From the Markup Properties toolbar click Delete Markups RESULT The selected entity or entities are deleted from the current active file NOTE You can also press the Delete key to delete the markup entities Alterna tively right click the entity in the workspace or Markup Navigation Tree and select Delete Formatting Markup Entity Properties With AutoVue you can modify the formatting of a markup entity via the Format option from the Markup menu or via the Markup Entity Properties dialog See Using the Markup Entity Properties Dialog When creating a markup entity you have the option to change the line color line style line thickness arrow style fill color and fill type Additionally you can assign the markup entity the same color as the layer 269 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES Changing Line Color TASK 1 Select the markup entity or entities for which you want to change the line color 2 From the Markup menu select Format and then select Line Color ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click Line Color Alternatively right click the entity in the workspace or Markup Navigation Tree select Format and then select Line Color STEP RESULT The Line Color dialog appears
218. line and arc must be parallel i NOTE The line axis must be parallel to the plane Arc Distance between Distance between Center the axes of the the arc axis and arcs the plane NOTE Arcplanes NOTE The plane must be parallel and the arc plane must be perpen dicular Plane Distance between the two planes NOTE Theplanes must be parallel TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure Be nONAt INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure STEP RESULT The Measurementdialog appears 2 Click the Distance tab 3 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring ADDITIONAL INFORMATION See 3D Snapping Modes for more information STEP RESULT All entities of the selected snapping modes are highlighted on the model 4 From the Units list select a measurement unit 161 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES MEASURING IN 3D FILES 5 On the model select an entity as the starting point for the measure ment ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you want to take more than one measurement from the same starting point select Fix Position 6 Select the snapping modes that you want to select as the end point for the measurement STEP RESULT All entities of the selected entity types are highlighted on the model 7 On the model select the entity you want to measure to RESULT The distance from the first set of entities to the second set is highlight
219. ls dialog 2D Specific Markups AutoVue provides a variety of user friendly markup options that you can use when marking up 2D files You can create entities such as arcs boxes circles clouds lines and polygons You can draw a leader with multi line segments and add text to it NOTE When you are creating a markup entity you can press the Escape key to cancel 219 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS 2D Markup Entities You can create many different types of 2D markup entities To access the markup entities from the Markup menu select Add Entity The available 2D markup entities are listed in the following table Markup Entity Arc Entity Information Click and drag the mouse to draw an Arc From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Arc N Box Click and drag to draw a rectangle From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Box c To draw a square instead of a rectangle press and hold the Shiftkey while you click and drag Cloud Click and drag to draw a Cloud From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Cloud A Circle Freestyle Click and drag to draw a circle From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Circle g To draw a circle instead of an ellipse press and hold the Shiftkey while you click and drag Create freestyle entities From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Freestyle Ze See Adding a Freestyle E
220. m the menu See 3D Views Views Access native views of the model or access and create your own views You can also right click in the workspace and then select from the menu See 3D Views ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 118 WORKING WITH 3D FILES DISPLAY ATTRIBUTES Menu Sub Menu Description Page Next Page Go to the next page of a multi page file From the Autovue toolbar you can also click Lp Previous Page Go to the previous page of a multi page file From the Autovue toolbar you can also click ELI Page Number Go to the specified page of a multi page file From the Autovue toolbar you can also click EE Display Attributes AutoVue provides several different render methods to display a 3D CAD model You can also adjust the degree of transparency change color or visibility to suit your preferences Render Modes The choice of render mode varies between the level of detail and the render speed of the model For example a shaded model is three dimensional and highly detailed but requires more time to render The different render modes are as follows Method Description Wireframe A skeletal model constructed using lines and curves that represent the model s true edges All internal lines are visible Shaded A solid model constructed of planes and surfaces These surfaces are shaded to increase the illusion of three dimensions Hidde
221. markups are saved in a separate file called a Markup or a Markup file When you display a file with its markups the markups are overlaid as a layer on top of the drawing AutoVue provides a variety of flexible user friendly entities To name a few there are circles clouds polygons and leaders You can also attach text to entities insert a note for longer comments add attachments or add a stamp such as a company logo In addition you can create measurement markup entities and hyperlinks that link between the current file and other associated files or applications 15 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL AutoVue Basics This section introduces the basics of working in AutoVue such as starting and exiting Auto Vue the help menu changing the locale of Auto Vue displaying file versions information and the AutoVue graphical user interface GUI The section on the AutoVue GUI discusses the included menu bars tool bars navi gation panel and navigation tree AutoVue Version Information The About dialog displays AutoVue version and build information You can also view the version build number and build date of components that are shipped with AutoVue You can also export this information into a text file Viewing Version and Build Information To view product version information TASK 1 From the Help menu select About STEP RESULT The About dialog appears and displays the AutoVue version number and build date 2 To vie
222. ment file extension e n Total document pages p Current page number e N Total tiled pages P Current tile number Y Date Year M Date Month 289 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL PRINTING WATERMARKS D Date Day e W Date Day of week H Time Hour U Time Minute S Time seconds r New line NOTE A literal percentage mark is entered manually as You can also print system variables in watermarks Select a variable from the Insert Variable list Some Insert Variable options are user name browser and java home Adding a Watermark TASK 1 From the File menu select Print ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Print STEP RESULT The Print Properties dialog appears 2 Click the Watermark tab Enter the Watermark Text that you want to appear on the file 4 To insert a code in the watermark select a code from the Insert Code list ADDITIONAL INFORMATION For example if you select n Total document pages the total number of pages for the selected file will appear in the Water mark You can insert more than one code 5 To insert a system variable select a variable from the Insert Variable list ADDITIONAL INFORMATION For example if you select browser version the version of the browser that the file is displayed in will appear in the Water mark ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can insert more than one system variable 6 To s
223. ment to access the following measure options Option Description Angle Measure the angle between selected points From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Angle 2 Arc Measure an arc entity From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Arc ad Area Measure a selected area From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Area 2 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 224 MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Option Description Distance Measure the distance between two points From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance a Measuring Distance Use the Distance option to measure the distance between two specific points See Changing Measurement Units and Symbols Changing Font TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Distance ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Measurement Entities dialog appears From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance lt 2 Fromthe Measured Distance Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point 4 Click another point on the drawing to define the end point STEP RESULT The measured line path appears as an entity on the current active markup 5 Move the cursor and click a location on the drawing to display the measure distance STEP RESULT The measurement and unit appear
224. mponent top side or component bottom side Only the logical layer that defines the actual outline of the component is considered A component entity is usually made up of geometries on different logical layers silkscreen keepout and so on but only the logical layer that defines the actual outline of the component is consid ered 91 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES DESIGN VERIFICATION Type Manufacturing Design Rule Check Minimum Annular Ring Description Specify the minimum distance between the pad outline and the outline of its drill hole on all physical layers The two outlines geometries are part of the pin pad entity but on different logical layers Minimum Pad Diameter Specify the minimum diameter of a pad Only applicable to rounded pads Acute Angle in degrees Specify the minimum acute angle between connected traces on the same physical layer Only two traces belonging to the same net are considered Minimum Drill Hole Size Specify the minimum diameter of the drill hole size allowed Only applicable to rounded pads 10 Maximum Drill Hole Size Specify the maximum diameter of the drill hole size allowed Only applicable to rounded pads Electrical Maximum Via Count Specify the maximum via count allowed for a net ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 92 WORKING WI
225. n Line A wireframe constructed with all internal lines hidden Silhouette A wireframe constructed with all internal lines visible but including additional silhouette edges These are not true edges but help to visualize the model Wire Polygons A skeletal model constructed of unfilled polygons 119 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES DISPLAY ATTRIBUTES Method Description Shaded Wire An outlined solid model constructed of planes and surfaces The outline is a solid line and the model s surfaces are shaded to increase the illusion of three dimensions Reflective A solid model constructed of planes and surfaces These surfaces are have a reflective sheer to accentuate the model s shadows Reflective Wire An outlined solid model constructed of planes and surfaces The outline is a solid line and the model s surfaces have a reflective sheer to the model s shadows Changing the Render Mode To change the render mode of the selected model or model parts perform the following TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visual Effects and then select Rendering ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Render Mode STEP RESULT Render mode options are listed 2 Select a render mode from the list STEP RESULT The selected render mode is highlighted RESULT The model or selected model parts change to the selected render mode Changing the Visibili
226. n also click Fill Color P Alternatively right click the entity in the workspace or Markup Navigation Tree select Format and then select Fill Color STEP RESULT The Fill Color dialog appears From the Fill Color list select the color that you want for the markup entity P ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Selecting Bylayer Z changes the markup entity color to the color of the layer it is on and selecting Line Color assigns the same color as the markup entity s line To define a custom line color from the Line Color list select Custom Color Y From the Color dialog that appears select a color and click OK STEP RESULT The fill color changes for the selected markup entity or entities Click OK to close the Fill Color dialog ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Any new markup entities that you create will have the new fill color 273 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES Assigning a Markup Entity the Same Color as the Layer Changing Font TASK 1 Select the markup entity or entities for which you want to assign the color of the layer that they belong to To assign the line color From the Markup menu select Format and then select Line Color The Line Color dialog appears NOTE From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click Line Color Alternatively right click the entity in the workspace or Markup Navi gation Tree select Format and then select Line Color From
227. n applies to shaded and shaded wire models as well as reflective and reflective wire TASK 1 Select the model or model parts whose transparency you want to adjust 2 From the Manipulate menu select Visual Effects and then select Transparency ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Trans parency STEP RESULT The Set Transparency dialog appears 3 To adjust the transparency move the slider left or right 121 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES LIGHT SETTINGS 4 Select Apply Dynamically if you want the transparency to simultane ously change with the movement of the slider ADDITIONALINFORMATION Alternatively to adjust the transparency level you can enter in the Value field a value from 0 to 1 Where 0 renders the model opaque default state and 1 renders it transparent 5 Click Close to apply the changes and close the Set Transparency dialog Light Settings The default light setting consists of a white light at the 10 o clock position with respect to the model In the Lighting dialog it appears as a grey ball of white light at the 10 o clock position along the circumference of the larger sphere Ambient lighting is the overall lighting that surrounds an object It provides constant illumination to every surface of the model This type of lighting is particularly effective as a fill light for surfaces not directly illuminated by a directional light source
228. n in the Background list select where to position the image and then click OK To add multiple background images repeat steps 1 through 4 6 You can change the order of the background images To do so select a file from the Background Images list and then click Up to move an image to the front and Down to send an image to the back 7 To edit the background image select the file from the Background Images list and then click Edit STEP RESULT The Background Image dialog appears Edit as required 8 To remove a background image from the Background Images list select the file and then click Remove 9 Click OK when done RESULT NOTE The selected background image is implemented ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 184 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 3D FILES Miscellaneous Display Model Tree Manipulator Selection From the Configuration tree expand 3D and then select Miscellaneous to display the Miscellaneous option The Show Global Axes option is active by default Disable this option to remove the axes that display in the bottom right corner of the workspace You can change the size of the global axes by moving the Size of Axes slider Move the slider to the left to minimize the axes and to right to maximize Enter a value in the Expand Level field to define the level at which you want the Model Tree to display when opening a 3D file The default level is 3 Alternately select Expand On Dem
229. n the Color Options dialog the options that you can configure are grouped under Common PCB and 3D View as follows Common Option Description Background Set the background color for all views except the PCB 3D view and file types Selection Set the color when selecting an entity PCB Option Description Min Distance Set 1 Set color for the first minimum distance set Min Distance Set 2 Set color for the second minimum distance set Plated Drill Hole Set color for plated drill holes The default color is black To override the native color select Override Native Color NOTE Applicable to Cadence Allegro format only 189 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR EDA FILES 3D View Option Non plated Drill Hole Description Set color for non plated drill holes The default color is black To override the native color select Override Native Color NOTE Applicable to Cadence Allegro format only Option Default Board Color Description Configure the color of the board in 3D view Default Component Color Configure the component color in 3D view Enhanced Display Options You can configure the following enhanced display options for EDA files ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 190 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING BACKGROUND COLORS FOR GRAPHIC FILES Main Menu Display Options Option Pl
230. n the Model Tree Only items selected in the View column are visible on the 3D model Visibility settings are saved and will be restored the next time you open the PMI filtering dialog NOTE AutoVue supports default PMI visibility as saved in the file To restore default PMI visibility click Default in the PMI Filtering dialog Aligning to a PMI Entity From the Model Tree right click the PMI item that you want to align to and select Align To AutoVue aligns to the selected PMI item Go to a Displayed PMI Entity From the Model Tree right click the PMI item that you want to go to on the model and select Go To AutoVue zooms to the selected PMI item ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 134 WORKING WITH 3D FILES PMI ENTITIES PMI Configuration Entities Views Captures The Views Captures Reference Grouping entities refer to specific configura tions of the model These PMI configuration entities are listed in the Model Tree and are activated by right clicking the entity and then selecting Activate The View configuration entity displays predefined views and highlights associ ated PMI entities TASK 1 Expand the Views tree to display the defined views 2 Right click the selected view and then select Activate RESULT The model and PMI entities display in the workspace as defined in the selected view The PMI entities are also highlighted in the Model Tree The Captures configuration entity displays predefined
231. nannenny OSSES Ve Eai SENES SEE E OSES SISTE r ThS 294 CONVETS ON ie n E EE E EE A AE E E AEE pistes aaa E E 296 Conversio OPtiON Snarieenusiieni aniria oki i aE cellars To a AE eee a 296 Conv rting a 3D LOIS ay sex coven cvsnscvnvcecunoaseonnnsovdscosswcoovesndovyogn cossanas acouvese svoncsusdarqusnntesioneiusesespoaussmanmaviowen 297 2I D PANEER EEE E Gh eel Saldana E E taal Gece ETTE 298 P 31a in CE E ASE EN A EEE E Eee nt hey een ae me 298 Ghanging the Pen Settings cancuaarsassaceaoriierau ae A E RRE RRRA 300 Appendix A EDA Terms and Definitions cessessscsesssscsesssssscssncsnsssscesssssssessnceasssscsscsssesscsnseaseascsecesseaseens 302 FOGG as eienaar aE E E Ea a r ne a i E S 310 Gen ral INQUINIES cas Jacatuaidarieeinnaimosaueiouwidandaadeaaliaiianiletendean aietianarnmnacitads 310 SALSA CIUNI NOS sess vdess A A A esaov oda sts egivag aa dua R staged E E 310 CUSTOMEN SUPPO en lassie a a alent tac ale ae eile aera e 311 Audience Preface The Oracle AutoVue User Manual explores AutoVue s key capabilities and is designed to help you get the most out of AutoVue s extensive functionality For the most up to date version of this document go to the AutoVue Docu mentation Web site on the Oracle Technology Network at http www oracle com technetwork documentation autovue 091442 html This manual is intended for Oracle AutoVue end users Related Documents For more information see the following documents
232. native and user defined views You can switch to a standard native or user defined view as well as add or delete user defined views NOTE The Views tab displays only for 3D drawings Views FH Default view A HP camera views e Isometric S Liat Views i MD Default Isometric L gal User Defined Views ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 24 AUTOVUE BASICS AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE Markup Navigation Tree Status Bar When you are in Markup mode a Markup Navigation Tree appears below the workspace If the tree does not appear from the Options menu select Show Panel and then select Markup Panel Markups wa Markup Entity Author LastModified A Page Layer Y Untitled2 I Text JohnDoe 04 09 2008 11 51 06 4M 1 0 Leader JohnDoe 04 09 2008 11 51 08 AM 1 0 bnb JohnDoe 04 09 2008 11 51 22 4M 1 0 Highlight JohnDoe 04 09 2008 11 51 244M 1 0 O Box JohnDoe 04 09 2008 11 51 29 AM 1 0 F Line JohnDoe 04 09 2008 11 51 31 AM 1 0 The tree displays a hierarchy of markups or comments created by users You can navigate through the markups A set of properties is generated for each markup You can sort the markups in the tree according to each property by clicking the column headers These properties are Property Description Markup Entity Type of markup entity created Author The name of the user who created the markup entity Last Modified The date and time the markup entity was
233. nd the buttons on the right correspond to a translational movement along the three axes and the scaling up and down 139 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES TRANSFORMING A 3D MODEL Transforming a Model Using Illustration Buttons TASK 1 po o NADM 11 From the Manipulate menu select Transform and then select Define ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also select Trans form STEP RESULT The Transformation dialog appears Select the model part or parts that you want to rotate translate or scale ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one model part press the Shift or Control key while selecting If no part is selected transformation is applied to the entire model Use the rotate or translate buttons to transform the model To set the translate rotate and scale increments click Options ADDITIONAL INFORMATION When you click a rotation translation or scale button the model transforms in increments of the values entered in the Options dialog STEP RESULT The Options dialog appears Enter the Translate Increment value in inches Enter the Rotate Increment value in degrees Enter the Scale Increment value Click OK to close the Options dialog Click Reset to set the model to its original transformation Click Close to close the Transformation dialog STEP RESULT The transformation state remains displayed To restore the default state of a part of t
234. ndow was selected while attaching the file it will open in the current AutoVue window If Associated application was selected while attaching the file it will open in its associated application In the tree right click the attachment entity in the tree select Attach ment and then select one of the following Open The attachment opens in AutoVue IfA new applet window was selected while attaching the file it will open in a new AutoVue window If Current applet window was selected while attaching the file it will open in the current AutoVue window Open With You have the option to open the attachment with AutoVue or its Associated Application ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 210 Markups MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES Editing an Attachment TASK 1 Inthe Markup Navigation Tree right click the attachment and select Edit or double click the markup entity STEP RESULT The Attach File dialog appears 2 Make your changes and click to OK STEP RESULT The dialog closes and modifications are implemented Adding a Hyperlink A hyperlink is a link between the current file and a new file a third party soft ware applicaiton ora Web page URL You can create hyperlinks in your current file so that your outside files software applications and Web pages only a click away The main benefit of adding hyperlinks is that the files are accessible from one location but the information is referenced not duplic
235. ne entity press the Shift or Control key while selecting RESULT The selected entity or entities appear highlighted in the workspace and in the Navigation Panel If the selected entity is too small a flash box appears indicating the location of the highlighted entity in the workspace See Searching Using Entity Search Zooming to a Selected Entity To zoom to a selected entity perform the following steps TASK 1 If you selected an entity from the workspace or Navigation panel right click and select Zoom Selected 2 Ifyou selected an entity from the Entity Search dialog right click and select Zoom Selected RESULT AutoVue zooms to the selected entity in the workspace 67 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES FILTERING ENTITY TYPES Filtering Entity Types With the Entity Filter option you can choose to display certain entity types while hiding others You can also limit the types of entities you can select in the workspace TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Entity Filter STEP RESULT The Entity Filter dialog appears 2 Under the Visibility column perform one of the following Select the check box beside the entity types you want to display in the workspace Deselect the check box to hide the entity types 3 Under the Selection column perform one of the following Select the check box beside the entity types th
236. ne is oriented along the XZ plane From 3 Vertices Select three vertices on the object to define the orientation of the section plane From Face Normal Select a face on the object to define the orientation of the section plane perpendicular to the face From Edge Tangent Select an edge on the object to define the orientation of the section plane perpendicular to the edge s tangent Define a Plane Define X Y and Z coordinates to orient the section plane Cut Options In the Define Section dialog you can use the following cut options to define the cut through of an object ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 142 WORKING WITH 3D FILES SECTIONING Option Description Don t Cut Display the object without a cut Cut Object displayed is cut along the section plane Invert Reverse the selection display the other part of the object Show Both Restore the cut part of the object Edges Only Display only the edges of the object along the section plane Defining the Section Plane and Cut through TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Section and then select Define ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Sectioning if STEP RESULT The Define Section dialog appears 2 From the Section Plane list select the orientation for the section plane From the Cut Options list select the cut option that you want 4 To define the plane posit
237. neces sary to decompress the file Double click a file to display it within AutoVue If you would like to markup an archived file the file must be made accessible to AutoVue in a decompressed form From the File menu select Properties to open the Properties dialog The Prop erties dialog provides information specific to the current active file such as file name file size date of creation and file type The file properties that you can view are Property Tab Description File Properties Information specific to the current active file such as filename file size date of creation file type number of pages and x y amp z dimensions It also indicates if the file is loaded from a streaming file Resource Resources specific to the current active file such as text font shape Information file line style and external reference files Native Properties Custom properties for file types such as last person who saved the file signature verification and author comments DMS If AutoVue is integrated with a backend DMS PLM ERP system a DMS tab appears that lists file attributes retrieved from the backend system ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 30 AUTOVUE BASICS OPENING FILES NOTE The Properties dialog varies for each file format that is open As a result some property tabs may be absent when viewing a file Viewing File Properties To view file properties TASK 1 From the File menu select
238. new Thickness appears beside the Color Index 6 Inthe Print Properties dialog configure other print properties Configure other print options 8 To view a partial view of the file click Partial Preview STEP RESULT The Partial Print Preview dialog appears 291 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL PRINTING PARTIAL PREVIEW OF A FILE 9 Click OK to print STEP RESULT The Print dialog appears indicating the document is printing Creating a New Pen Setting TASK 1 Set the thickness for the color indices that you want 2 Click Save As The Save As dialog appears 3 Enter a file name with a c2t extension then click OK STEP RESULT The new pen setting appears in the Current Pen Settings list 4 Inthe Print Properties dialog click OK to print RESULT The Print dialog appears indicating the document is printing Deleting a Pen Setting TASK 1 Select the pen setting that you want to delete from the Current Pen Settings 2 Click Delete STEP RESULT The pen setting disappears from the list 3 Click Cancel to close the Print Properties dialog Partial Preview of a File The Partial Print Preview dialog displays the printable area on top of the page area so that users can have a clear idea of what will be printed NOTE Option is only enabled when Current is selected from Document Pages TASK 1 Configure the print properties ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 292 PRINTING PREVIEWING A FILE
239. nt to find in the Find What field ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you are searching in a vector file select a text string from the list You can refine your search by selecting Match Whole Word Only or Match Case Click Find Next STEP RESULT AutoVue highlights the text and zooms into the text area For PDF files AutoVue highlights the text but maintains the current zoom level Click Close to close the Find dialog 2D Viewing Options From the View menu you can change how the active file is displayed in the workspace For example you can zoom into an area of the drawing magnify a part of the drawing and rotate a file s orientation clockwise counterclockwise You can access these options from the View menu The options are 33 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 2D FILES 2D VIEWING OPTIONS Zoom Menu Sub Menu Zoom Box Description Click and drag to draw a box around an object that you want to enlarge to fill the window From the Autovue toolbar right click in work space and select from pop up menu Zoom In Zoom in by a factor of 2 From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Q Zoom Out Zoom out by a factor of 2 From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Q F Zoom Previous Reverts to the previous zoom level From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Q f You can also right click the workspace and select Zoom Previous Full Resoluti
240. nter Arc Highlights arcs on the The arc is highlighted when you hover the ae model mouse pointer Arc Center Highlights arcs and The arc is highlighted and a tooltip appears circles on the model indicating the arc center coordinate of the arc when you hover the mouse pointer NOTE When measuring Minimum Distance the arc center is selected However when measuring Distance the infinite arc axis is selected Face Plane Highlights faces when The face is highlighted when you hover the a you move the cursor mouse pointer over a face Measuring Distance Use the Distance option to measure the distance between two vertices edges arc axes faces or any combination of these entity types NOTE To revert to the Point to Point distance measurement set the SHOW_POINTOPOINT_PAGE INI option Refer to theInstallation and Config uration Guide for more information The following table details how the distance between two entities are measured using snapping modes 255 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Snapping Vertex Line Arc Center Plane Mode Entities Vertex Distance The shortest The shortest The shortest between two segment segment segment points connecting the connecting the connecting the point and the point and the arc point and the line plane Line Distance between The line and axis The distance two lines must be parallel between th
241. nthe Navigation Panel click the Bookmarks tab 2 Select3D Model from the navigation tree RESULT The 3D view of the PCB board is displayed in the workspace 3D view can also be accessed from the View menu selecting Page and then selecting Next or from the AutoVue toolbar and then clicking Next Page _ Cross Probing Cross probing is the ability to select elements in the schematic and have them mapped to the corresponding components in the layout drawings and vice versa The following sections provide information on cross probing between two or more EDA files displaying the net connectivity when cross probing and cross probing between 2D and 3D views of the same file Cross Probing Between Two or More EDA Files The Cross Probe option lets you select entities in the schematic drawing or the PCB design to highlight in all the open files TASK 1 Open an EDA file to cross probe 2 From the Analysis menu select Cross Probe ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Cross Probe STEP RESULT The Cross Probe dialog appears 3 Click Add File 83 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES CROSS PROBING In the Open dialog that appears enter the file name or browse to locate the file you want to cross probe then click Open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To add multiple files to the Cross Probe dialog repeat steps 3 and 4 When adding multiple files from the same director
242. nting Markup files and you want to print the visible layers from the Markup menu select Markup Layers STEP RESULT The Markup Layers dialog appears Select the markup layers you want visible Click OK to close the Markup Layers dialog From the File menu select Print ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Print STEP RESULT The Print Properties dialog appears Configure the print properties To view a partial view of the file click Partial Preview STEP RESULT The Partial Print Preview dialog appears Click OK to print RESULT The Print dialog appears indicating the document is printing With the Batch Print option you can send a list of files to print at the same time You can also generate a batch by simultaneously opening all the files included in the batch print TASK 1 From the File menu select Batch Print STEP RESULT The Batch Print dialog appears ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 294 PRINTING BATCH PRINTING To add a file to be printed click Add STEP RESULT The Open dialog appears Enter the file name or browse to locate the file or files that you want to add then click Open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To add more files to the list repeat steps 2 to 3 To remove a file s select the file from the List of files to be printed and click Remove STEP RESULT The files appear in the List of files to be printed Click Print in the Batch Print dialog STEP RESULT
243. ntities press the Shift or Control key while selecting The selected entity or entities are highlighted in the workspace If the selected entity is small a flash box appears indicating the location of the highlighted entity in the workspace See Zooming to a Selected Entity From the Workspace To select an entity from the workspace perform the following steps Click an entity in the workspace to select it To select more than one entity press the Shift or Control key while selecting The selected entity or entities appear highlighted in the workspace and in the Navigation Panel If the selected entity is small a flash box appears indicating the location of the highlighted entity in the workspace You can also apply selection filters when selecting entities in the workspace See Filtering Entity Types When you hover the mouse over an entity in the workspace a tooltip with infor mation about the entity s attributes appears The tooltip displays whether or not you select the entity ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 66 WORKING WITH EDA FILES ZOOMING TO A SELECTED ENTITY From the Entity Search Dialog To select and entity from the Entity Search dialog perform the following steps TASK 1 Perform an attribute based or entity type based search using the Entity Search dialog 2 Select an entity or entities from the Entity Types list or the Attributes list of the Entity Search dialog To select more than o
244. ntities 220 2D non vector measure 224 angle 228 258 arc 228 area 227 calibrate arc 58 106 165 229 240 248 260 calibrate distance 53 101 162 226 236 244 257 cumulative distance 226 distance 225 2D vector measure 233 angle 238 arc 239 259 area 103 237 calibrate arc 58 106 165 229 240 248 260 calibrate distance 53 101 162 226 236 244 257 cumulative distance 236 243 3D 252 text 262 3D markup entitites 252 3D measure angle 238 arc 239 259 create 253 minimum distance 260 vertex coordinates 261 attachment 209 252 265 edit 211 open 210 change arrow style 272 change fill color 273 change fill type 272 change font 274 change line color 270 change line style 270 change line thickness 271 color 274 consolidate Markup files 208 delete 269 EDA measure angle 246 arc 247 area 245 cumulative distance 236 243 distance 242 EDA markup measure entities 240 minimum distance 248 Entity Types 196 filtering 196 formatting markup properties 269 freestyle 221 contiguous 221 non contiguous 222 go to 265 grouping 268 hiding all markups 267 316 hiding selected markups 268 hyperlink 211 create 211 delete 213 edit 213 open 213 intellistamp 230 add 230 layers 203 change color 205 create 204 delete 207 moving a markup entity 207 rename 206 set active 205 toggle 206 leader 223 marking up 2D files 208 marking up 3D files 208 Markup Entity Properties dialog 275 arrow style 278 custom color 279
245. ntity Highlight Click and drag to highlight a boxed area From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Highlight P The highlighted box will be filled with a transparent color Leader Create leader entities From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Leader ca See Adding a Leader Line Click and drag to draw a line From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Line A I To draw a line and force it to be aligned to the closer axis horizontal or vertical press and hold theShiftkey while you click and drag See Aligning a Line Segment to the Vertical or Horizontal Axes ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 220 MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Markup Entity Measurement Entity Information Create markup measure entities From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance Vanes Area Angle Arc or Minimum Distance See Creating 2D non Vector Markup Measure Entities Creating 2D Vector Markup Measure Entities Creating EDA Markup Measure Entities Note Add a note to the markup From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Note See Adding a Note Polygon Click and drag to draw a polygon From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Polygon dX Polyline Click and drag to draw a polyline From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Polyline A To force a line segment in
246. ntity ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Selecting Bylayer changes the entity color to the color of the layer Click OKto close the Markup Entity Properties dialog Defining a Custom Line Color To define a custom line color take the following steps TASK 1 From the Line Color list select Custom Color FA STEP RESULT The Color dialog appears Select a color and click OK Click OKto close the Markup Entity Properties dialog ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you selected markup entities prior to specifying a custom color only the selected entities will have the new line color To apply the new line color to any new markup entity you create make sure no markup entity is selected before opening the Markup Entity Properties dialog RESULT The line color changes for the selected markup entity or entities ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 276 MARKUPS FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES Line Style Change the line style for a selected markup entity or entities TASK 1 Select the markup entity you want to change the line style To select multiple markup entities press the Shift or Control key while selecting 2 From the Line Style list select the required line style 3 Click OK to close the Markup Entity Properties dialog ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Any new markup entities that you create will have the new line style RESULT The line style changes for the selected markup entity or entities Line Thickness
247. o do so highlight the text and then select Copy from the Edit menu alter nately you can use the shortcut key Ctrl C You can then paste the text to the Note markup entity or a third party application for example MS Word NOTE Note the following behaviors when copying text from a PDF file in AutoVue It may not be possible to copy text if the PDF file has a security restriction When copying text from PDF files AutoVue displays the text as it appears in the PDF That is Auto Vue inserts a line break if text continues to a next line word wrapping in the PDF In some PDF files when copying text that includes line spaces AutoVue may not insert the spaces This is because the line spaces are not saved in the PDF file 49 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 2D FILES MEASURING IN 2D FILES Measuring in 2D Files AutoVue provides the ability to perform measurements in 2D files Measure ment options vary between vector and non vector files For vector files Auto Vue provides the option to snap to fixed points on the drawing For non vector files the Snapping Modes option is disabled However you can free snap to any point on the drawing AutoVue provides several measure options that you can choose from You can access the measure options from Analysis menu and selecting Measure or from the AutoVue toolbar click Measure i The measure options are as follows Name Description Dis
248. odel indicating the middle edge coordinate when you hover the mouse pointer ArcA Highlights arcs on the The arc is highlighted when you hover the model mouse pointer Arc Center Highlights arcs and The arc is highlighted and a tooltip appears circles on the model indicating the arc center coordinate of the arc when you hover the mouse pointer NOTE When measuring Minimum Distance the arc center is selected However when measuring Distance the infinite arc axis is selected Face Plane a Highlights faces when you move the cursor over a face The face is highlighted when you hover the mouse pointer Measuring Distance Use the Distance option to measure the distance between two vertices edges arc axes faces or any combination of these entity types The following table details how the distance between two entities are measured using snapping modes ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 160 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MEASURING IN 3D FILES Snapping Vertex Line Arc Center Plane Mode Entities Vertex Distance The shortest The shortest The shortest between two segment segment segment points connecting the connecting the connecting the point and the point and the arc point and the line plane Line Distance between The line and axis The distance two lines must be parallel between the line Distance between and the plane NOTE The lines the
249. odel are highlighted From the Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the edge length ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you want to cumulate the measurement of more than one edge select Cumulative ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 166 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MEASURING IN 3D FILES 4 Click the edge that you want to measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To take another measurement click Reset STEP RESULT The edge length measurement appears in the Measurement dialog 5 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Measuring Face Surface Use theSurface option to measure the surface area of an entity face or an entire entity on the model TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure ie STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 2 Click the Surface tab 3 Select Face Surface if you want to measure the surface area of a face on an entity 4 Select Entity Surfaces if you want to measure the surface area of an entire entity 5 From the Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the surface ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you want to cumulate the measurement of more than one surface click Cumulative 6 Ifyou selected Face Surface move the cursor on the model to high light a face surface then click the face surface that you want to measure STEP RESULT The face surface is highlighted The measured surface app
250. of DMS If AutoVue is connected to multiple backend DMS systems a list of the DMS system names appear when you click DMS F Select the DMS from which you want to open files STEP RESULT An authentication dialog appears 1 A DMS PLM ERP UCM system is referred to as DMS in this document 2 Depending on the type of backend system AutoVue is connected to the button name will change ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 28 AUTOVUE BASICS OPENING FILES 3 Enter the login information and then click OK STEP RESULT The backend DMS system files appear in the File Open dialog 4 Select a file and then click Open RESULT The file opens in the AutoVue workspace Searching for Files in a Backend DMS System When AutoVue is connected to backend DMS system you can search for files in the system by entering specific search criteria in the File Open dialog Refer to your integration documentation for more information on logging onto your DMS system TASK 1 From the File menu select Open STEP RESULT The File Open dialog appears 2 To search fora file in the backend DMS system from the left panel click Search DMS F ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If AutoVue is configured with a single DMS the name of the DMS appears instead of DMS If AutoVue is connected to multiple backend DMS svstems a list of the DMS system names appear when you click Search DMS TL Select the DMS in which you want to perform the search STEP RESULT
251. om the Arc tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Radius Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance From the Units list select a unit of measurement to which you want to calibrate the distance Click Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate to a value Click Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate by a factor Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration results appear in the Arc tab Click Close to close the Measurement dialog ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 106 WORKING WITH EDA FILES MEASURING IN EDA FILES 107 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL Working with 3D Files From AutoVue s 3D mode you have many ways in which to manipulate the model For example you can select model parts to transform independently from the rest of the model as well as modify the selected model part s visibility and attributes 3D mode also gives you the ability to perform an entity search and compute mass properties and it allows you to import 3D models into the current window and export files to other formats Additionally the Global Axes inform you of where the X Y and Z axes are positioned throughout all the oper ations you perform in AutoVue The Perspective option shows objects in three dimension with distances planes and curved surfaces adjusted to give a sense of depth You have lighting options where you can adjust the overall lighting surrounding a model or just its source light
252. om the Filemenu selectPrint ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Print 2 STEP RESULT The Print Properties dialog appears 2 Click the Margins tab 3 Enter the margin size that you want for Left Top Right and Bottom or click Minimum if you want to set the margins to the minimum acceptable for the selected printer 4 To define margins that are less the minimum acceptable for the selected printer select Override Printing Minimum Margins 5 Fromthe Units list select the unit to which you want to set the margins 6 Configure other print options 7 To view a partial view of the file click Partial Preview STEP RESULT The Partial Print Previewdialog appears 8 Click OK to print RESULT The Print dialog appears indicating the document is printing ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 286 PRINTING HEADER FOOTER Header Footer From the Headers Footers tab of the Print Properties dialog you can define the headers and footers that you want to print on every page of the document You can enter the text manually or choose from a list of Insert Codes The list of insert codes are f Full path of document v Document Drive d Document Directory b Document Base name e Document file extension n Total document pages p Current page number N Total tiled pages P Current tile number Y Date Year M Date Month D Date Day W Date Day of week H Time Hour
253. on Show Drawing Information Select Single Entity Displays information for the selected entity See also Viewing Details of a Single Entity for more information List block attributes and tags See also Viewing Tags Attributes for more information List Tags Attributes View information of a set of entities See also Viewing Information for a Set of Entitiesfor more information Entity Information Comparing 2D Files AutoVue provides the ability to visually compare two files and display color coded comparative data Generally when comparing two files you should first open the newer version of the document and then compare it with the older version When comparing files AutoVue displays three windows e The right window displays the newer version of the document The left window displays the older version of the document The bottom window displays the comparison results By default the result windows display added deleted and unchanged entities ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 44 WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES In the Comparison Result window you can specify whether you want to display only the additions deletions or unchanged or any combination of the three To access these options right click in any window and select an option from the pop up menu By default the Comparison Result window displays the unchanged deleted and added informat
254. on Display the file at full resolution From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Q ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 34 WORKING WITH 2D FILES 2D VIEWING OPTIONS Menu Fit NOTE Resizing the AutoVue window when an image in the workspace has been zoom fitted Horizontal Vertical or Both results in the proportional resizing of the image Sub Menu Horizontal Description Fit the image horizontally in the active window The vertical dimensions of the image are zoomed proportionally but may be too large or small for the window You can also right click the workspace and select Zoom Page Width Vertical Fit the image vertically in the active window The horizontal dimensions of the image are zoomed proportionally but may be too large or small for the window Both AutoVue finds the best fit for the current file with respect to both its vertical and horizontal dimensions From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click eB You can also right click the workspace and select Zoom Fit Pan and Zoom Window Display a close up view of a particular area of a file while maintaining a view of the entire file From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click a The Pan and Zoom Window option is disabled for text based documents and spreadsheets See Using the Pan and Zoom Window for more information Pan Click and drag to move the drawing To exit r
255. onent instances and the associated pins The top portion of the tab lists all the instances of the currently displayed page of the drawing The lower portion of the tab lists the associated pins for selected instances 21 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL AUTOVUE Basics AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE Nets Tab When you select a component it appears highlighted on the drawing To select more than one component press the Shift or Control key while selecting All the selected components and their associated pins are highlighted Components wi Components C345 CAP 0402 2 C344 CAP 0402 1 C343 CAP 0402 1 C342 CAP 0402 1 C360 CAP 0402 1 lt Component Pins Name Net Pin U C341 1 3 3VDC UNSF C341 2 GND UNSF aa gt Components Nets Bookmarks NOTE The Nets tab displays only for EDA drawings The Nets tab lists nets and associated net nodes pins connected to a net The top portion of the tab lists all the nets of the drawing s currently displayed page The lower portion of the tab lists the associated net nodes for the selected nets All selected nets are highlighted on the drawing To select more than one net press the Shift or Control key while selecting Alternately in the Nets panel ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 22 AUTOVUE BASICS AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE you can click and drag in the Navigation Panel list to select multiple nets The Nodes on Net panel lists the associ
256. oose from 201 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP FILES Markup Files DXF Output dfx AutoCAD DWG dwg Microstation DGN Output dgn Setting the Active Markup File A file can have several Markup files When you open several Markup files simul taneously you can set one as the active Markup file Any changes you make is applied to the current active markup TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Open Markup s amp or from the bottom left corner of the status bar you can click Markup Indicator If the Markup Indicator icon does not display the file you opened has no existing markups associated to it STEP RESULT The Markup Files dialog appears 2 From the Markup list select the markup or markups you want to open 3 From the Active Markup list select the markup you want to make active ADDITIONAL INFORMATION An active markup displays in bold in the Markup Navi gation Tree 4 Click OK RESULT The selected markups appear in the AutoVue workspace Changing the Active Markup File When you have multiple Markup files open you can change the active markup NOTE An active markup displays in bold in the Markup Navigation Tree Take one of the following steps In the tree right click the name of the Markup file you want to make active then select Set Active From the Markup too
257. operties toolbar you can also click Arrow Style S Alternatively right click the entity in the workspace or Markup Navigation Tree select Format and then select Arrow Style NOTE Any new entities that you create will have the new arrow style Changing Fill Type TASK 1 Select the markup entity or entities for which you want to change the fill type From the Markup menu select Format and then select Fill Type ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click Fill Type Alternatively right click the entity in the workspace or Markup Navigation Tree select Format and then select Fill Type STEP RESULT The Fill Type dialog appears ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 272 Markups FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES From the Fill Type list select the fill type that you want for the markup entity Select Solid Fill if you want the fill color to be solid Select Transparent Fill if you want the fill color to be transparent Select No Fill if you do not want any fill color Click OK RESULT The fill type changes for the selected markup entity or entities Any new markup entities that you create will have the new fill type Changing Fill Color TASK 1 Select the markup entity or entities for which you want to change the fill color From the Markup menu selectFormat and then select Fill Color ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Properties toolbar you ca
258. orresponding net is highlighted in the workspace and in the Navigation Panel From the workspace or Navigation Panel right click the selected net and then select Show Entity Properties STEP RESULT The Entity Properties dialog appears displaying the properties of the selected net Click OK to close the Entity Properties dialog Show Net Instances You can display the instances of a net in a multi page file TASK 1 From the Navigation Panel click the Nets tab and select the net you want to view STEP RESULT The net is highlighted in the Navigation Panel and in the work space 71 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES NAVIGATING DESIGN HIERARCHY 2 From the View menu select Go to Net Instances or right click the highlighted net from the Navigation Panel or workspace and select Go to Net Instances STEP RESULT AutoVue highlights the instance or instances of the selected net If the selected net appears on multiple pages the Go to Net Instances dialog appears Go to Net Instances Please select a page Cancel 3 Select the page on which you want to view the net instance then click OK RESULT The selected page is displayed and the instance of the selected net is highlighted Navigating Design Hierarchy AutoVue supports navigation through the hierarchical structure of a schematic drawing A hierarchical block in a schematic is a symbol that refers to a child schem
259. ort 2 In the Markup ID field enter an ID consisting of any combination of characters or numbers 3 Click OK RESULT The Markup file is saved The markups and the Markup file remain displayed in the workspace and in the Markup Navigation tree 199 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP FILES Opening Markup Files To open a Markup file TASK 1 View a file that has existing markups 2 From the Markup menu select Open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Open Markup s a or from the bottom left corner of the status bar you can click Markup Indicator ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If the Markup Indicator icon does not display then the file you opened has no existing markups associated to it STEP RESULT The Markup Files dialog appears 3 From the Markup list select the check box next to Markup file you want to open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you select more than one Markup file the Active Markup menu lets you select which one of them is initially active See Setting the Active Markup File for more information 4 Click OK RESULT The selected markup or markups appear in the workspace on top of the original file NOTE When you select more than one Markup file the markups display simul taneously Saving an Existing Markup File To save a modified existing Markup file from the Markup menu select Save NOTE From the Markup Prope
260. ou can also click Layers STEP RESULT The Layers dialog opens 2 Click Add STEP RESULT The Add Layer Set dialog appears 3 Enter the layer set name ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 80 WORKING WITH EDA FILES LAYER SETS 4 Click OK STEP RESULT The new layer set appears in the Layer Sets list 5 To modify the attributes of the new layer set select one or more layers and change the Visibility Order or Color 6 Click Apply to save the changes and to display the new layer set in the workspace 7 To define more layer sets repeat steps 2 to 6 8 Click Close to close the Layers dialog RESULT The new layer set appears in the Layers list beside the Layers Control button amp on the AutoVue toolbar Deleting User Defined Layer Sets To delete a user defined layer set perform the following steps TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Layers STEP RESULT The Layers dialog opens 2 From the Layer Sets list select the user defined layer set you want to delete ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can only delete user defined layer sets 3 Click Delete ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The layer settings of the deleted layer set remain displayed on the screen until you select another layer set 4 Click Apply to save the changes Click Close to close the Layers dialog 81 ORAC
261. ou can select entities from the results list to highlight them in the workspace and the Navigation Panel You can also export the search results to a csv file If the selected entity is small a flash box appears indicating the location of the highlighted entity in the workspace To open the Entity Search dialog from the Edit menu select Entity Search From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Entity Search If your sche matic has multiple pages a Defining Scope dialog appears Defining Scope Scope Current Schematic Page Entire Schematic Design Cancel Select Current Schematic Page to browse through only one page Select Entire Schematic Design to browse through all schematic pages Click OK after making your selection The Entity Search dialog appears Entity Search Entity Types Attributes Attribute Name v Add Filter Value v Attribute Value Entity Types Net Name Pin List Net Class 38 EC1 81C12 41 Unclassed 5 109 51012 8 Unclassed 6 1 9 21012 11 Unclassed 15 105 21C11 101 Unclassed 24 1011 41C8 41C Unclassed 25 EC1 10041 5 Unclassed 39 R3 1 R4 2 DA Unclassed 40 EC1 9 0A1 1 Unclassed POS EC1 13C9 10 Unclassed VNEG EC1 15C9 20 Unclassed 44 EC1 11A3 20 Unclassed NET19 1C11 1 ICT1 31 Unclassed DATA Fra 2171113 Inelassed lt ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 96 WORKING WITH EDA FILES SEARCHING USING ENTITY SEAR
262. ough functions By default the Move through walls option is selected This feature allows you to walk through walls when viewing a model You can deselect the option to enable the collision detection feature The Restore last view option saves the last view of the model before exiting walkthrough mode As a result when you re enter walkthrough mode the last view displays Select the Show walkthrough dialog at startup option to display the Walk through dialog when you enter Walkthrough mode Deselect the option to disable the Walkthrough dialog on startup 169 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES WALKTHROUGH NOTE If you want to re enable the Walkthrough dialog on startup from the Options menu select Configure From the Configuration dialog select Miscella neous and then select the Show walkthrough dialog at startup checkbox Refer to Configuring AutoVue for 3D Files for more information Walking Through a 3D Model If you want to position yourself on a surface of the 3D model press the Alt key and double click a point on the surface For example to walk through a 3D model of a house you can Alt double click the landing in front of the door Once you are at your desired view point of the 3D model you can use the arrow keys or mouse to navigate through the model The following table lists the available keyboard mouse actions and their func tion Keyboard Action Mouse Action Function Up arrow Do
263. ows you to access different named views of a file TASK 1 From the View menu select Views STEP RESULT The Select a Named View dialog appears ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 42 WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES 2 From the list select the view that you want to display 3 Click OK RESULT The selected view is displayed NOTE To return to the default view select Default View Specifying a View Point The View Point option allows you to render a drawing from a selected view point TASK 1 From the View menu select View Points STEP RESULT The View Point dialog appears 2 Enter the X Y and Z coordinates for the view point with which you want to render the drawing 3 Click OK RESULT The drawing is displayed from the selected view point Analyzing 2D Vector Files With the analysis functionality you can measure entities compare two files or view drawing information These options are available under the Analysis menu The following table lists all the options from the Analysis menu 43 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES Menu Sub Menu Description Measure Measure the distance area angle and arc of an entity From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click ia See also Measuring in 2D Files for more information Compare Compare two files See Comparing 2D Files for more informati
264. p entities such as attach ments hyperlinks signoffs and stamps See 2D Specific Markups for information on markup entities that are specific to 2D files See 3D Specific Markups for information on markup entities that are specific to 3D files ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 208 Markups MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES NOTE When you are creating a markup entity you can press the Escape key to cancel the action The following tables lists common markup entities for 2D and 3D files Option Description Attachment Add an attachment entity to the markup From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Attachment X See Adding an Attachment Hyperlink Attaches a hyperlink as a markup From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Hyperlink Yo See Adding a Hyperlink Signoff Creates an approval stamp containing information about the markup author date and time of creation From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Signoff A See Adding Signoff Entities Symbol Adds a symbol markup to the document From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Symbol PA See Adding a Symbol Adding an Attachment In AutoVue you can attach a file of any type for example text audio or video as a markup entity The attachment is embedded into the markup entity and displays as an icon the display TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity
265. p menu select Add Entity and then select Text ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click 3D Text H The Attach To dialog appears and provides six snapping options ADDITIONAL INFORMATION None Does not snap to the model Vertex Snaps to a vertex on the model Option Description Edge Snaps to an edge on the model 3 4 Face Mid Edge Snaps to the middle of an edge on the model Ar Center Snaps to the center point of an arc on the model Snaps to a face on the model To insert a text box that snaps to a part of the drawing with a leader line select one of the snapping modes Click and drag on the drawing to define the dimensions of the text box ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 262 MARKUPS 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS 10 11 Click in the text box and enter the text you want to add ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The height of the text box will change to accommo date the text To change text box font properties from the Markup menu select Format and then select Font ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the respective font property lists on the Markup Properties toolbar you can also modify the font type style and size STEP RESULT The Font dialog appears allowing you to change the font type style and size Click OK to implement the font changes and to close theFont dialog To change the line properties or fill color of the text box select the text box th
266. pecify an axes aligned boundary box The boundary box of an entity must be inside it to meet the search criteria Performing a Search TASK 1 From the Edit menu select Entity Search ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Entity Search STEP RESULT The Entity Search dialog appears Click the 3D Search tab From the Selection list specify what parts of the model that you want to search e To search the entire model select All To search specific parts of a model select Selected and then select the parts on the model To search the model parts that are not selected select Not selected From the Type list select the type of entity that you want to search ADDITIONAL INFORMATION For 3D Models that have PMI information the PMI search features are enabled Select the Show PMI parent entity in results check box if you only want the parent entity of the selected PMI entity or entities to appear in the Results list Deselect the check box if you want all PMI entities to appear in the Results list ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The option is enabled if PMI or All are selected from the Type list and the file has PMI entities ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 154 WORKING WITH 3D FILES ENTITY SEARCH From the PMI Filter list select the type of entities that you want to search e To search all entities select All To search entities with PMI select With PMI To sea
267. possible to add or remove existing symbols TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Symbol The Symbols dialog appears ADDITIONA INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Symbol amp k Click the Libraries tab Click Create STEP RESULT The Symbol Library dialog appears Symbol Library 4 Selected Files Name Description Keywords Author Enter the library name description author and keywords in their respective fields ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 218 MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS To add a symbol to the library click Add STEP RESULT The Open dialog appears Browse to locate the symbol you want to add and then click Open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To add more symbol repeat steps 4 to 6 To remove a symbol select the symbol and click Remove STEP RESULT The file appears in the Symbol Files list Close the Symbol dialog Deleting a Symbol Library TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Symbol The Symbols dialog appears ADDITIONA INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Symbol Click the Libraries tab From the Symbol Libraries list select the library that you want to delete Click Delete STEP RESULT The library disappears from the list and from the Symbol Library list under the Symbols tab Close the Symbo
268. ppears 4 Select a Color Click OK ADDITIONALINFORMATION Only the entities that were created with the Bylayer Z color defined in the Markup Layers dialog will change color Any entities that were created using the color options from the Markup Properties toolbar will override the Bylayer color and will not change 6 Click OK to close the Markup Layers dialog 205 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP LAYERS Renaming a Markup Layer After you create a markup layer you have the option to rename the layer TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Markup Layers The Markup Layers dialog appears From the Markup Layers list select the markup layer you want to rename Click Rename STEP RESULT The New Markup Layer dialog appears Enter the new layer name Click OK STEP RESULT The markup layer is assigned the new name Click OKto close the Markup Layers dialog Toggling between Markup Layers From the Markup Layers dialog you can choose to show or hide a layer and its associated markup entities TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Markup Layers The Markup Layers dialog appears 2 To show hide a layer or layers perform one of the following a Select a layer and click Toggle The layer s check box will switch between selected and deselected To view all the markup layers click All On To hide all markup layers click All Off b From the Markup Layers list selec
269. previous releases of AutoVue a Symbol markup entity was called a Stamp ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 216 Markups MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES as the graphical entity but differences between the Sybmol and native file should be expected TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Symbol ADDITIONA INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Symbol N STEP RESULT The Symbols dialog appears Symbols Symbols Libraries Symbol Library E Drag and drop symbol into AutoYue Draft APPROVED z Scaling Isotropic Anisotropic Selected Symbol Source File Symbol Name Description 2 Click the Symbols tab 3 From the Symbol Library list select the library from which you want to select a Symbol STEP RESULT The Symbols appear for the selected library 4 Click Isotropic if you want to scale the Symbol proportionately Click Anisotropic if you want to scale the Symbol disproportionately 217 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES Drag the Symbol onto the workspace ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To add more Symbols repeat steps 3 to 5 STEP RESULT The Symbol appears on the drawing and in the Markup Naviga tion Tree Close the Symbols dialog Creating a New Symbol Library Once a Symbol library is created the existing library should not be modified If it is modified it will not be
270. r or brightness right click directly on the small ball and select Light Properties STEP RESULT The Light Property dialog appears 3 Select a color from the Color menu ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can drag the Brightness and Specularity slide bars to modify the brightness of the source and the brightness of the model s reflection to light respectively 4 Click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To set the light properties to its default setting select Default STEP RESULT The light properties modifications are applied 5 Click Close to close the Lighting dialog ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 124 WORKING WITH 3D FILES 3D Views Removing a Light Source 3D Views Default View TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visual Effects and then select Lighting STEP RESULT The Lighting dialog appears 2 Right click directly on the small ball that you want to remove and select Remove Light STEP RESULT The small ball disappears and the light change is reflected 3 You can also select Default to restore the lighting properties to its default setting 4 Click Closeto close the Lighting dialog You can display different views of 3D Models or create your own views The following sections provide information on the default view of the model the available camera views native views and user defined views The Default View is the view of the model when it is initially loaded usually it is the view in which the mod
271. r values set in the Default Board Thickness and Default Component Height fields 5 Reload the file to see your changes Synchronizing Layers when Comparing Files When you compare files you can synchronize all layer settings When the layer settings are synchronized changing one setting changes the same setting for both files you are comparing NOTE This option is selected by default and is only applicable for PCB drawings TASK 1 From the tree expand EDA and then select Analysis 2 Select the Layer Settings option to synchronize all layer settings when comparing files Configuring Zoom Behavior when Cross Probing You can configure the zoom options when you cross probe files TASK 1 From the tree expand EDA and then select Analysis ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 188 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR EDA FILES 2 Select one of the following Cross Probe Action options a Select Keep Current Zoom Level When this option is active the view of the target files remains the same while you cross probe b Select Zoom Selected to automatically zoom in on selected entities while you cross probe This option is enabled by default c Select Zoom Fit to automatically adjust the contents of a file along the horizontal and vertical axis to fully display within the current window Modifying Colors You can configure the colors for EDA files From the tree expand EDA and then select Colors I
272. raphically intersected with any traces on the same physical layer Verifying a Design The following steps describe how to verify a design TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Verify Design STEP RESULT The Verify Design dialog appears To enable a design rule select the associated check box in the Design Rules section of the dialog To disable a design rule deselect the check box ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can sort the design rules by clicking the column headings for Enabled Description or Value To add a value to the selected design rule double click the corre sponding row of the Value column and enter a value ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The selected design rule must be enabled to be able to add a value In the Maximum Violations field enter the maximum number of results you want to display in the Results list From the Distance Units list select the unit you want to use as the unit of measure ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 94 WORKING WITH EDA FILES DESIGN VERIFICATION 7 Click Verify ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Verify button changes to Stop To stop the Design Verification process at any point click Stop When the process is complete the total number of errors found during the Design Verification process up to the maximum number specified in the Maximum Violations field appear in the Results list 8 To view the description of a violation result select the violation from
273. rch entities without PMI select Without PMI From the PMI Type list select the type of entity that you want to search ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The PMI Type list is disabled if All is selected from the PMI Filter list Click Search to perform the entity search RESULT The search results appear in the Results list Performing a 3D Text Search From the Containing Text field of the Entity Search dialog you can search for a text string in the 3D model By default AutoVue searches the attribute name and attribute value for the entered text Enter the text you want to search for in the Containing Text field and then click Search Performing an Attribute based Search From the Entity Search dialog you can search for entities by their attributes such as color density shading and so on TASK 1 From the Edit menu select Entity Search ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Entity Search STEP RESULT The Entity Search dialog appears Click the 3D Search tab Select the search criteria that you want to use for your search 155 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES ENTITY SEARCH 4 Click Add STEP RESULT The Attribute Filter dialog appears Attribute Filter Name COLOUR _ Any value 10 11 12 Colour Yalue Test Equals value From the Name list select the attribute that you want to search STEP RESU
274. re ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 148 WORKING WITH 3D FILES COMPARING 3D FILES 2 From the Analysis menu select Compare Sets STEP RESULT The Compare Sets dialog appears Compare Sets S 3DCatiaSFrontDriveAssembly CATFA S 3DCatiaS4CPulley CATPart Page 1 Page 1 Producti 3DCatia54CPulley CAT Par 5 3DCatiaSBalanceShafl Solid 0 3DCatiaSB alanceS Annotation Set 1 Solid 0 Datums 5 3DCatiaSPowerSteerin Simple Datum B 3DCatiaSPowerSte Datum Target Solid vi B Dimensions he a e a BCe Click BY Set 1 4 Select the entities from either the tree on the left or the tree on the right ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The tree on the left is the base file and the tree on the right is the compare file STEP RESULT The selected entities appear in the Set 1 list 5 Click Set 2 6 Select the entities from the other tree that you did not select for Set 1 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To compare entities from the same file select the enti ties for Set 1 and Set 2 from either the base file or the compare file STEP RESULT The selected entities appear in the Set 2 list 149 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES GENERATING A BILL OF MATERIAL 7 Click OK STEP RESULT The Compare Tree and the three windows are updated with the set comparison results 8 To restore the comparison files from the Analysis menu select Compare Files RESULT The file
275. re than one part press the Shift or Control key when selecting STEP RESULT A model size representation of the Global Axes appears through the model part or parts and are enclosed by a three dimensional box 3 Click and hold the mouse button on the sphere at the end of the axis you want to rotate ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The initial mouse movement determines which of the two axes will mark the site of rotation If the axis you selected does not rotate 137 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES MANIPULATING A 3D MODEL around the right axis for the rotation that you want to make click the sphere again and move the mouse in a different direction Clicking on an axis sphere allows rotation around one of the other two axes Move the mouse to rotate the model by the selected axis ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you want to rotate the selection freely as done in Rotate Mode press the Control key during rotation To exit Manipulate mode click Manipulate od or from the Manipu late menu select Manipulate ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To restore the default state of a part of the model from the Manipulate menu select Transform and then select Reset Selected To restore the default state for the whole model select Reset All Scaling a Model Along the X Y and Z Axis TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Manipulate sui INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Manip ulate 35 STEP RES
276. reated from Auto Vue provides several conversion file formats for you Conversion Options From the File menu select Convert to open the Convert dialog Depending on the conversion type being performed the available options in the Convert dialog may vary These options are Option Description Color Depth Select an option from the list 1 Black and white 4 16 colors 8 256 colors 24 True color auto AutoVue selects the color depth that best matches the original file Convert to Format A list of all the possible types of output file formats currently available for conversion The available formats are PDF TIFF Windows Bitmap NOTE Conversion to PDF is not supported when the Auto Vue server is running on Linux platforms Output Specify the name and path of the file in which the conversion is to be stored This file is also known as the output file You can use Browse to provide AutoVue with the file s path If writing onto an existing file a warning message appears asking if you want to overwrite the existing file ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 296 CONVERSION CONVERTING A 3D MODEL Option Description Sub Format The Sub Formatlist appears when you select HP Laserjet Print or TIFF from the Convert to Format list Select a sub format from the list Convert Region The area of the file to be converted The available options are Display The area displayed in the workspace
277. results in a csv Comma Separated Values file To view the properties of an entity select the entity from the Entity Types list or the Attributes list then right click and select Show Entity Properties STEP RESULT The Entities Properties dialog appears and displays the properties for the selected entity 97 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES SEARCHING USING ENTITY SEARCH 12 To show the net connectivity click the Attributes tab select the entity from the list then right click and select Show Net Connectivity STEP RESULT The net connectivity for the selected entity is highlighted in the workspace 13 Click Close to close the Entity Search dialog Performing an Attribute based Search The following steps describe how to perform an attribute based search TASK 1 From the Edit menu select Entity Search ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Entity Search amp STEP RESULT The Entity Search dialog appears 2 Click the Attributes tab 3 From the Attributes list select an attribute ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To sort the list by Owner Type or Value click the column heading that you want to sort by STEP RESULT The Owner Type and Value of the selected attribute appear in the list 4 Ifyou want to search by owner select an owner from the Owner Filter list 5 Ifyou want to search by value select a value from the Value Filter list ADDITIO
278. ription Edge All edges are highlighted Select an edge to use as the central reference point A snap box appears when moving the mouse over an edge Midedge Highlight all edges in the model Select a mid edge to use as the central reference point Arc Center Highlight all arcs and ellipses in the model Select an arc center to use as the central reference point A snap box appears when moving the mouse over an arc or ellipses indicating the center of the arc Face Select a face to use as the central reference point When moving the cursor along a model face the face is highlighted Re Centering a Model to an Entity Model Tree To re center a model to an entity perform the following TASK 1 From the View menu select Re Center and then select Entity STEP RESULT The Re Center dialog appears 2 Select the entity that you want to use as the central reference point STEP RESULT All instances of the entity are highlighted 3 Click an instance of the entity STEP RESULT The model is repositioned using the selected entity as the central reference point 4 Close the Re Center dialog The Model Tree displays the model s hierarchy inter relation of different parts assemblies bodies and missing XRef notifications With the tree you can select different parts and modify their attributes such as color visibility render mode or transformation 113 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES
279. rkup measure entities The measure options in Markup mode work slightly different than in View mode NOTE When you are creating a markup entity you can press the Escape key to cancel 3D Markup Entities You can create many different types of markup entities To access the markup entities from the Markup menu select Add Entity The markup entities are Option Description Text Add text to the markup From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click 3D Text Ge See Adding Text ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 252 MARKUPS 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Option Attachment Description Add an attachment entity to the markup From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Attachment N See Adding an Attachment Hyperlink Click the workspace to attach a hyperlink From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Hyperlink X See Adding a Hyperlink Measurement Create markup measure entities From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance Areata Angle Arc Boor Minimum Distance ai F See Creating 3D Markup Measure Entities Note Signoff Add a note to the markup From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Note See Adding a Note Create an approval stamp containing information about the markup author date and time of creation From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Signoff A See Adding Signoff Ent
280. rkup mode work slightly different than in View mode See 2D Specific Markups NOTE When you are creating a markup entity you can press the Escape key to cancel When measuring in Markup mode the specified measurement lines and values are displayed on the current active markup layer as entities These entities can be moved resized or deleted You can also modify the font of a measure entity align a free snap measure entity to the horizontal or vertical axis as well as add ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 240 MARKUPS CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES units of measure and symbols to a measurement and have them appear on the drawing AutoVue provides the option to snap to geometrical or electrical points on the drawing In Markup mode you can choose from several measure options to create markup measure entities From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Measurement to access the following measure options Option Description Angle Measure the angle between selected points From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Angle 2 Arc Measure an arc entity From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Arc a Area Measure a selected area From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Area a Distance Measure the distance between two points From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance Minimum Distance Measure the minimum distanc
281. rnal resources such as fonts or XRefs you may need to specify the path to these external resources if they do not exist in the same location as the base file Path Description XRefs The directory paths for any external reference files associated with 2D 3D or EDA files Font The directory paths for fonts required by AutoVue s vector files Configuring XRef Paths XRef Paths are the directory paths for any external reference files associated with 2D 3D or EDA files TASK 1 2 From the Category tree expand General and then select XRef Paths Click Add STEP RESULT The Add Path dialog appears Enter the directory path or scroll to locate the directory where the external reference files are located To browse all subdirectories below the current path type two aster isks at the end of the file path For example C samples results in browsing all subdirectories below samples To browse one subdirectory below the current path type one asterisk at the end of the file path For example C samples results in browsing one subdirectory below samples Click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To add more than one path to the list repeat steps 3 to 5 STEP RESULT The directory path appears 175 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL CONFIGURING AUTOVUE GENERAL OPTIONS To change the order select the path you want to move then click Up or Down to move the path to where you want it in
282. rom the backend can be done once during Stamp creation the attribute is configured with the ReadOnce permission by the system administrator or the backend values can be read when requested the attribute is configured with the Read permission by the system administrator The following describes each attribute e Ifan attribute is configured with the Edit permission then you can modify the value of the attribute on the Stamp e Ifan attribute is configured with the Write permission then you can save the value on the Stamp to backend system NOTE Provided that you have permissions to update the attribute on the backend system e Ifan attribute is configured with the Hidden permission then you cannot see the attribute on the Stamp However you can view the attribute in the Edit dialog and when editing the Stamp 231 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS e Ifan attribute is configured with the current date or user name default values then these values are displayed on the Stamp only if no value is retrieved from the backend system 1 You can view the attributes of a Stamp by double clicking the Stamp markup entity The DMS Attributes dialog appears and lists all attri butes of the Stamp DMS Attributes To edit the value double click on it Name Yalue Value From DMS title Administrator keywords M unknown M unknown r_modifier 2009 05 27 08 01 5 Administrator ADD
283. rties toolbar you can also click Save Markup id If you have multiple markups open that you have modified and want to save them all from the Markup menu select Save All To save an existing markup as a new markup from the Markup menu select Save As ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 200 MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP FILES Importing a Markup File To import a Markup file on top of the original file TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Open Markup s STEP RESULT The Markup Files dialog appears Click Import STEP RESULT The Select Markup File to Import dialog appears Navigate to the markup file that you want to import and select it Click Open RESULT The imported Markup file appears in the workspace on top of the orig inal file Exporting a Markup File To export a Markup file TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Save As ADDITIONAL INFORMATION For anew Markup file you can also click Save Markup i STEP RESULT The Save Markup File As dialog appears 2 Click Export STEP RESULT The Save As dialog appears Navigate to the location where you want to export the Markup file 4 Enter file name Click Save RESULT The Markup file is exported to the selected directory The default format saved is Markup Files but you can select another one In the Save as Type list there are six formats to ch
284. s TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers amp ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Layers STEP RESULT The Layers dialog opens 2 Ifthe Logical Layers section is not open click Expand 3 Select the layer or layers that you want to move To do so you can do one of the following Select a physical layer from the Physical Layers section Logical layers associated with the selected physical layer are also selected When you make changes to a selected physical layer the logical layers associated with it are also affected Select one or multiple logical layers from the Logical Layers section To select multiple logical layers press the Shift or Control key while selecting 4 Click one of the following buttons Click Bring to Front F to move all selected layers to the front in the workspace In the Logical Layers section these layers move to the top of the list Click Up _ to move selected layers up one layer Click Down to move selected layers down one layer ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also drag and drop selected logical layers in the Logical Layers section 5 Click Apply to see the changes in the workspace STEPRESULT The file now displays according to the layer scheme you arranged Also logical layers are renumbered in the Order column of Logical Layers section 6 You can now save your changes as a user define
285. s W Filing 3 2 y y a ties W Line Weights V Load External References 3X0 Force to black W Line Caps Joins Model PMI Raster Colors Background C Full Resolution Miscellaneous Od ena iii Fit To Window i Analysis Colors Rendering Display Options Enable Look Ahead Gaphks Desktop Office Resources V Resolve Local Resources OK Cancel 2 From the Configuration tree select General RESULT The CAD Raster and System Options appear Configuring Options for CAD Files Configure how you want to display text dimensions line styles and so on for CAD files Option Description Text Select to display text entities Clear to hide text entities 173 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL CONFIGURING AUTOVUE GENERAL OPTIONS Raster Files Rendering Resources Option Description Dimensions Select to display all dimensional entities Clear to hide all dimension entities Line Weights Select to display varying line thicknesses Clear to make all lines appear equal with a width of 1 pixel No line weights display for any line Force to Black Select to force all colors of a drawing to black Clear to display the file in color Line Style Select to display dotted and dashed lines Clear to display all lines as solid Filling Select to display filled entities as filled rather than just an outline Clear to hide filling for filled entities Load E
286. s appear in the three windows Generating a Bill of Material For 3D files you can obtain a list with a count of the parts required for manu facturing the item featured in the file To generate a Bill of Material BOM TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Generate Bill of Material STEP RESULT The Bill of Material dialog appears Bill of Material Count Part Names SDPROE_BODY PRT 3DPROE_STEM PRT 3DPROE_COVER_SEAT_1 PRT 3DPROE_COVER_SEAT_2 PRT SDPROE_COVER_SEAT_GUIDE PRT SDPROE_COVER PRT 3DPROE_COVER_SCREW PRT 3DPROE_TOP_BALL PRT SDPROE_BACK_BALL PRT SDPROE_TOP_SEAT_GUIDE PRT SDPROE_BACK_SEAT_GUIDE PRT 2 Tosort the list numerically click the Count column header 3 To sort the list alphabetically click the Part Name column header ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 150 WORKING WITH 3D FILES GENERATING A BILL OF MATERIAL To view a part or parts on the model select the parts from the Part Name column ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one part press the Shift or Control key while selecting STEP RESULT The parts are highlighted on the model and in the Model Tree To save the Bill of Material click Export STEP RESULT The Save As dialog appears Enter a file name or browse to locate the directory where you want to store the file then click Save STEP RESULT AutoVue saves the results in a csv Comma Separated Values or xml file Click Clo
287. s crite eect iin eae a ais 215 Addi ga SymMBo lsn ananena aniier ii sues ubris caulunaastchasisebsanetaaces 216 Creating a New Symbol Library sssssssessesssssssssessssssssssssssessessessesseeseesoseoseeeeeseeeeesereereereeeeereereeeeeeereeeeees 218 Deleting a Symbol Library s sssssssssessesssssesseseoseeereereereeeterteeseeseesreeresreeresreeresrrsrrsrssessessessessnsssssessssss 219 2D Specie Mak S e a erreia e E E I n A ees oeie cece E T 219 DUD Markup Entiti ES ansann na E E E N s 220 Adding a Freestyle Entity o00o0osoosoosoosooeoseoetoeeeeeeseeeereereereereeereeeeeeeeeerersseeereerreresessessessessnssnssssesss 221 Aligning a Line Segment to the Vertical or Horizontal AX S c scsssssesssssssssseessseseesnsencensens 222 Addi ngalead r siiin isiksi n REER in i 223 Creating 2D non Vector Markup Measure Entities ccsessccssscseesssssccsncsscssssseessssseesnsseeseesees 224 Greating a Sta Pinsan an a A a ARA E A A R E E e 230 Creating 2D Vector Markup Measure Entities sseessesseeesssssssssssseeseesssssssseoeseeesssssnssesseerssessnsssssseeseee 233 2D Vector Snapping Modes sesssssssssssseeessesssssesstecseesssssssssessteeosssnsssesseeesreosssssesseeeeresrsssssseeerreerssss 234 Measuring DISCAIVE Grays Ki oe acta ale AO sac cca NON ON ea aa eiaa aE itae 235 Measuring Cumulative Distance ccsesssssessssssssseesecsessessnccssssscsuccsessuseaceascescessssecsuseaseaseescesseaseess 236 Calibrating Distance
288. s selected paper size This option also allows you to modify the paper size Orientation Portrait Specify if file should be printed portrait Landscape Specify if the file should be printed landscape Auto Specify if orientations should be printed as saved in the file Units From the drop down list set the unit for Scaling and Alignment Offset The available units are pixels inches and millimeters Scaling Fit to Page Scales the image to fit on the output page Factor Specifies the number of drawing units per specified number of inches Scale Scales the image according to a percentage You can select a predefined scaling factor or manually enter a custom scaling factor Decimal places are accepted Alignment Offset Specify where the drawing will appear on the printout You can define custom alignment in inches by entering a X and Y value NOTE This feature is disabled for spreadsheet formats Document Pages Specify the document pages to print All Current or Range 283 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL PRINTING PRINT OPTIONS Print Dialog Section Page Area Option Description Select the page area to print Extents Print the extent of the document Displayed Print the area displayed in the View window Option is always enabled Limits Prints the file limits instead of extents Option is disabled when Current is selected for
289. s srrasss reiissi aaoo eE eaa oaeiae Iaoa a aei aaea aa ESE aE Paa eeina 178 Overlays Extents Settings nissin O S a n a a o aias 178 COMMOUNIAG E E0 o EAEE EREET E 178 Configuring AutoVue for 3D Files essessessssssessscsscsssssscssscsssussaccssssscssscsscsnscascsussacesscsecsuscascanseacessenses 179 Rendering mercean iia E EE A EA E AAE ERA E AE RN 179 Dynamic Rendering ssssseesssesssssssssssssssnsssssssssssssssssessesseesensenneeseeneeseseeseeseeseeseesereeeeertereeeeereeeeereereeeerrersres 179 Frame Rate siose En a iaae REA aed a a e N Eaa aa it 180 Optimized REnNd riN Orena nn era e a oraa E a E a EEN s 180 Mode a a Na a n a a Raa 180 Loading es assevestsy nA RAN A N RRT 181 Dynamic Load Mesh Resolution esssessssesseereereereereeeeeereereereerserseereeeeereeresresrrsrrseessesessnssessssssssssss 181 Initial Visibility sssnesemnnnonannna e a a a A EEE AES 181 PMI Initial Visibility ssassn thn aciceteceien Gel nuceiadca einan AR na i 182 PMI Filter Oe unaenecsin ene rE Ee EEOSE SEENE EAEE SE ores EEEE S adsense 182 G nfiguring Color renna an a E T T S 182 Configuring Backgrounds neia ia eiaei seias sas 183 MISGellanGOus nnne n a N AA N raa EE S 185 Configuring AutoVue for EDA Fil6 S essssssssssssseesssssssssessceeseesssssssseeeseessossssssesseeessessnssesseeesressnssssseeesees 186 CUSTOMIZING SELECUIONS 5 siesadicresinsasesvisviesssanteceaosaiineeinapiertd oateerandiade matsnen a a aR 186 Displaying TOG PS sesiiv
290. scsesssscsessncsscsssssscssscsesnseacssssssceseeseesnsesees 98 Meas ring in EDA File Szssusnnnins isunen inn aiii on 99 EDA Snapping MOdeS icicccsstiansscmsanensinsinsaeiniaciacautentinnn dunsanndaannaamodennen 99 Measuring DISTANCE renina nuda ala aianbanutinddideateat nike 101 Calibrating Distan Enere eaaa n Aaaa saaan Sa AE SEs n E ESEE Seas 101 Measuring Minimum DistanCe esssesssseesssseessseesssecsssseessscersscerssseeessseeessseeosseeoseseosseesssseesssserssseeesse 102 Meas ring Ated cenean naa a A S a aE ELERES 103 Measuring aN Angleses ease SA ae heed eaea aeS anea eneses ine elansenrndaes 104 Me s ring aN ATC rissani saronaroati eoria sordas EAE E eiae Ea Saa tK AEE aE EES aa EE Ea aeaiia 105 Calibrating a NA C of sscrsenectensicedtteernnsourtastieceraneaeiti a e aE Taaie aa TESSI 106 Working With 3 D NSS soos ases ros cacsescasea tan A is A AA EEE 108 Models Tab and Model GG sessssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssesssssenseusenseneeseestestsseeseesersereererrereeereeeeeeereresres 108 Mews Tab isanirinonirniiiana n a n n a a 109 Bookmarks TaDrsiisnenanniianun iaa n a a n a an eaten a ee 110 Gl bal AXES enrera eiia ea aE eaa caste aO eaen castes dasbeusencsetvcteustudsapsevasicassSioces 110 Sel cting Model Parts taiensssatiucrnteenakiotatnnedaanaeaadniti ates ETN RnS 111 Select Model Parts from the WorkSpace secssssssssssssssesssssscsssssscssscsessnsssessnceaccsscseecnsssessnsencessesees 111 Selecting All I
291. se to close the Bill of Material dialog 151 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES ENTITY SEARCH Entity Search AutoVue allows you to search for entities in a 3D model using the Entity Search dialog Entity Search e E 3D Search Advanced 3D Search Containing Text Selection All Type ll Attribute Filters Definition PMI Filter PMI Type Results Type You can search the whole model or selected entities on the model perform a 3D text search apply attributes entity type or PMI filters as search criteria to filter entities You can also search for entities by the size of an entity and location or select entities from the results list and have them appear highlighted in the workspace and in the Model Tree The search options are ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 152 WORKING WITH 3D FILES ENTITY SEARCH Where 3D Search tab Option Selection Description Specify if you want to search the entire model or selected parts or parts that are not selected Type Specify the type of entity you want to search For example part body assembly or PMI Show PMI parent entity in results When selected displays only the parent entity of a PMI entity that matches search criteria If cleared displays PMI entities that match search criteria in the Results dialog Option is enabled if Type is set to PMI or All and file has PMI entities
292. semblies and Select Identical Parts to display all identical sub assemblies 111 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES RE CENTERING Re Centering The Re center option repositions the model back to the center of the View window You can use a model part as a central reference point to reposition a model You can select several model parts to use as one collective central refer ence point Re Centering a Model to a Selected Model Part TASK 1 Select the model part or parts that you want to re center 2 From the View menu select Re Center and then select Selected RESULT The model is repositioned using the selected model part or parts as the central reference point The Selected option is only available when one or more model parts are selected Re Center All The Re Center All option repositions the entire model back to the center of the AutoVue workspace TASK 1 From the View menu select Re Center and then select All STEP RESULT The model is repositioned to the center of the workspace Entity Reference You can use an entity as a central reference point to reposition a model The entities are as follows Entity Description Vertex All vertices are highlighted Select a vertex to use as the central reference point A snap box appears when moving the mouse over a vertex ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 112 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MODEL TREE Entity Desc
293. sing Descend Hierarchy cssssscsscsscssccssecssecssccssecssccecsescesuscssccssecssceasesssesnseescerseessees 73 EE VE EEE E E E EE EAEN AEEA 73 Physical and Logical Layers Sections s ssesssssessessescoseeeteereeeeereeereerereeersereeesereesrreresrrsreseessesessssss 74 Changing the Order of Layers ssssssesesssessessessssesssssnssnssssssssnssnssssssssenseusenneuseeneeneeseeseeseeeesereereeeeereeeere 75 Modifying Visibility for Physical Layers sessssscssecseccssecssesssecsscsecssccsecssecsscesseeseeesceeseesuecenceeseessees 76 Modifying Visibility for Logical Layers sssssssssssscsecssecssccssesssccsscssscssscssccssesssscssccssccsscessesseesseess 77 PAGING Rolaren teoriat oa ian ees e EL eae iE a e EE ei 78 Changing baye Color cies a a a TEE EN 78 S rti ng L gical LayETSsssssusssunasnnnnsnaaniiia sia tisini susuris 79 tayer SOUS canino a a a RA N E aa mea gianna cle EO E a E A 79 Viewing Layer Setau anae EAE A A E AA e E E RANG 80 Creating User Defined Layer Sets sssssscssecssscnsecssecssssessscssccssesssecsscesscesscessceseesuscenccsscesscesscenseess 80 Deleting User Defined Layer Sets sssssscsssscsscsscssccssscnsscnsecssscnscensesssssnscsscensccnscensessseenscensesseesnees 81 Saving User Defined Layers Sets With Markup sssssessersereeresersersersrrsesreseeereesesrrsseserssessesssss 82 Manipulating EDA VIEWS aini i arai E A E AE E RS 82 3D BWW safes tesa sass uscsa sau Boas agp Sa Ses N
294. ssecsssssssnssecssssasssussascsusenccascsscesssaecssceaceaseescssseaneess 166 Measuring the Length of an Edge cscssssssssssssssscssessessssscsssssscssssssssnsenccassscesssaeesuseaseassssceseeaneees 166 Measuring Face SUrfa CEs aisassissisissntoandennsieitentae a ieisrosesr ossia isu Desr TEKEE SES SaS SE Tseri osise 167 WalktAroug N Seane erT a a Ta ae aa a o E Ea R EEEa 168 Walkthrough Dialisis n A A NTON AT 169 Walking Through a 3D Model ssssssssseeesssssssssssscecseessssssssceceeesssssnsssosseeesseossssessereserosesssssseesrereresss 170 Adding Markups in Walkthrough MOde ssssssssssssssssssssscssssncsssssscecsssssessnssssssncsecssscseesnsencensess 171 Configuring AUtOVUE lennni RE EE AE EE R RTN NS 172 Genera CDCI CAS ssa E cada a acne EAEE E SE asi asa OS E i E N 173 Configuring Options for CAD Files s sessssssssssssceeseesssssssseecseesssssnsssesseeesseosnssessereseresnsssssseeerreesesss 173 Raster Files nmmnonm a a a aa e a capes a E a A EN ETIS 174 PRETEEN CI a a e NT r NEA AA A orien os 174 RUKTO LA EE E E E E E ES 174 Configuring Paths ciniiciGassnoansdinrcnadasonca i a EAEE E En 175 Measurement aee nel asin na A aR M etait an a S a ERS 176 Configuring the Base Font for Archive and Text Files sssesssssssssoeeseessssssssooseeesssssssssosceesses 177 Configuring AutoVue for 2D Fil S s sseessssssssseceeesssssssssesseeeseesnsssesseecseeososssssseeseeesresssssesseersressnssssseeeseee 177 Spa pSettiNg Sss
295. t on the base file where you want to set the lower left corner of the overlay Click another point where you want to set the upper right corner of the overlay ADDITIONAL INFORMATION As you select the point to define the position of the upper right corner you can resize the destination box 41 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES Click Scale if you want to resize the overlay Enter the XOffset and YOffset coordinates and or the Scale Factor ADDITIONAL INFORMATION XOffset and YOffset are relative to the base drawing and all options are displayed at their current values Click Warp to adjust the overlay Click a point on the overlay and drag the cursor to where you want the overlay starting point Click another point and drag the cursor to where you want the overlay to end ADDITIONALINFORMATION The overlay s size is scaled to accommodate the origin and destination points you defined Click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To modify other overlays repeat steps 2 to 4 STEP RESULT The changes are applied to the selected overlay Removing an Overlay Selecting Views TASK 1 From the File menu select Import File as Overlay STEP RESULT The Overlays dialog appears 2 Select the overlay that you want to remove 3 Click Remove STEP RESULT The overlay is removed from the list 4 Click OK RESULT The overlay is removed from the display The Views option all
296. t or a note e Create name and color layers to organize your work ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 194 Markups MARKUP NAVIGATION TREE Create a new Markup file that combines copies of selected layers of different Markup files Create measurement markup entities that can be moved or resized Note that measurements made in Markup mode have up to a 1 margin of error Navigate markups through a hierarchy tree view markup properties and sort the tree according to each property e View markup layers individually or in combination e When in Markup mode you can press Shift Left Mouse button to select multiple markups entities in order to drag or copy and paste to a new loca tion Press Esc at any point to cancel the markup creation Markup Navigation Tree When you are in Markup mode a Markup Navigation Tree appears below the workspace If the tree does not appear from the Options menu select Show Panel and then select Markup Panel Markups wa Markup Entity Author LastModified A Page Layer Y Untitled2 I Text JohnDoe 04 09 2008 11 51 06 4M 1 0 H Leader JohnDoe 04 09 2008 11 51 08 AM 1 0 bnb JohnDoe 04 09 2008 11 51 22 4M 1 0 Highlight JohnDoe 04 09 2008 11 51 24 4M 1 0 CO Box JohnDoe 04 09 2008 11 51 294M 1 0 A Line JohnDoe 04 09 2008 11 51 31 AM 1 0 The tree displays a hierarchy of markups or comments created by users You can navigate through the markups A set of properties is gen
297. t the check box next to the layer or layers To remove a layer from the filter deselect the associated check box In the Markup Navigation Tree a filter icon appears in the Layer column header NOTE To remove the filters from the Markup menu select Filter and then select Show All Working with Markup Files Markups can be saved as separate Markup files while working with the same document You have the option to add user information to the Markup file save 197 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP FILES Saved States and create separate Markup files with different markup IDs import and export Markup files or change the active Markup file When you create and save a Markup file with the exception of PDF files the view state of the file is also saved View states include zoom level extents rota tion settings transformation section plane and visibility When creating markups for 3D files containing imported models the imported design becomes part of the view state For EDA files you can save user defined layers sets with markups See Creating a User Defined View State information is also saved with each markup entity For instance if you were at a certain zoom level when you created a markup entity AutoVue saves the information with the markup entity To Go To the state you were at when you created or modified the markup entity from the Markup tree right click the markup entity
298. t the check box next to the layer or layers you want visible and deselect the check box next to the layer or layers you want to hide 3 Click OK RESULT The markup entities belonging to the selected layer or layers appear in the work space on top of the original file ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 206 MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP LAYERS Deleting a Markup Layer From the Markup Layers dialog you can choose to delete a selected layer and its associated markup entities TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Markup Layers STEP RESULT The Markup Layers dialog appears 2 From the Markup Layers list select the markup layer you want to delete Click Delete 4 Click OK RESULT The layer or layers are deleted along their associated entities Moving a Markup Entity to Another Layer Once you create a markup entity it is possible to assign it to a pre existing markup layer TASK 1 Select the markup entity or entities that you want to move 2 From the Markup menu select Format and then select Move to Layer ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click the markup entity select Format and then select Move to Layer STEP RESULT The Move to Layer dialog appears From the Layers list select the destination layer 4 Click OK RESULT The selected markup entity or entities are moved to the selected layer Only markup entities using the ByLayer color will change to the new layer s color
299. t to start the Freestyle entity Move the cursor to create the Freestyle entity 4 Click a point on the drawing where you want to interrupt the Freestyle entity 5 Click another point on the drawing where you want to restart the Free style entity ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can interrupt the Freestyle entity as many times as you like by repeating steps 4 and 5 6 Right click to end the Freestyle entity Aligning a Line Segment to the Vertical or Horizontal Axes A line segment drawn with the Free Snap snapping mod can be forced to align with the closer horizontal or vertical axis You can also take an existing line segment and have it align with the closer axis The types of line segments that you can align are lines line segments of leaders and polylines and measure enti ties See 2D Vector Snapping Modes for more information Free Snap TASK 1 To draw and force a line segment press and hold the Shift key while you click and drag for that line segment ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 222 MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Adding a Leader To force an existing line segment click and hold the left mouse button on the line segment then press and hold the Shift key When you see that the line segment is horizontal or vertical release the left mouse button then release the Shift key TASK From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Leader ADDITIONALINFORMATION From the Markup Entity
300. t you want to explode ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one model part press the Shift or Control key while selecting To explode the entire model ensure that no parts are selected 3 From the Maximum Depth list select the level to which you want the model to explode 4 Select Animated if you want to see an animated view of the explosion ADDITIONAL INFORMATION This option is selected by default 5 Select Show Arrows if you want to display the arrows 6 To explode the model click gt STEP RESULT The whole model or the select model parts explode 7 To implode the model click e ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To manually change the explosion state click and drag the scroll bar 8 Click OK to close the Explode dialog RESULT The explode state remains displayed and the Transformation column Bin the Model Tree is updated indicating the exploded parts See Resetting the Transformation of a 3D Model Saving an Exploded View of a 3D Model From the Explode dialog you can save the exploded view of the 3D model TASK 1 2 Explode a 3D Model Click Save View in the Explode dialog STEP RESULT The Add User Defined View dialog appears 145 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES COMPARING 3D FILES Enter a view name 4 Click OK STEP RESULT The view is saved and appears in the Views tab under the User Defined Views tree 5 Click OK to close the Explode dialog R
301. tance Measure the distance between two points See Distance in non Vector Files Distance in Vector Files Area Measure selected area See Area in non Vector Files Area in Vector Files Angle Measure the angle between selected points or between two lines See Angle in non Vector Files Angle in Vector Files Arc Measure an arc entity See Arc in non Vector Files Arc in Vector Files 2D Vector Snapping Modes The available snapping modes allow you to click to precise geometrical points on a drawing For example if you select Snap to End Point and you move the cursor over an end point of a line the end point will be highlighted by a snap box The snapping modes allow you to snap to the mid center and end points of an entity ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 50 WORKING WITH 2D FILES MEASURING IN 2D FILES ao Button Snap to Description End point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near a linear component s end point acl Mid point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near the halfway point of a linear component Center point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near the center of an elliptical component x Free snap Allow snapping at any point on the drawing NOTE When selecting a snapping mode you also have the opt
302. the markup line entity 3 Click OK to close the Markup Entity Properties dialog RESULT The arrow style changes for the selected markup line entity or entities NOTE Any new markup line entities that you create will have the new arrow style Fill Type Change the transparency for selected markup entity or entities TASK 1 Select the markup entity you want to change the fill type To select multiple markup entities press the Shift or Control key while selecting ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 278 Markups FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES 2 From the Fill Type list select the fill type that you want for the markup entity Select Solid Fill if you want the fill color to be solid Select Transparent Fill if you want the fill color to be transparent Select No Fill if you do not want any fill color 3 Click OK to close the Markup Entity Properties dialog RESULT The fill type changes for the selected markup entity or entities NOTE Any new markup entities that you create will have the new fill type Fill Color Change the line color fill color and fill type for a selected markup entity or enti ties TASK 1 Select the markup entity you want to change the fill color To select multiple markup entities press the Shift or Control key while selecting From the Fill Color list select the color that you want for the markup entity x ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Selecting Bylayer chan
303. the Line Color list select Bylayer A To assign the fill color From the Markup menu selectFormat and then select Fill Color The Fill Color dialog appears NOTE From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click Fill Color From the Fill Color list select Bylayer Click OK RESULT The selected markup entity or entities change to the color of the layer that the entity belongs to You can change the font of the text box leader and measurement entities TASK 1 2 Create the markup entity that you want From the workspace or the Markup Navigation Tree select the markup entity for which you want to modify the font then do one of the following From Markup menu select Format and then select Font The Font dialog appears From the lists select the font font style and font size You also can select to add a strikeout and underline by selecting their ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 274 MARKUPS FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES check boxes Click OK to the close the dialog and implement the changes From the Markup Entity toolbar select the font font size and font style bold italic and underline from their respective lists and buttons The font changes are implemented Changing Measurement Units and Symbols You can change the unit of measure and add a symbol to a measurement and have it appear on the drawing TASK 1 2 Create the markup measure entity that you want
304. the list To remove a path select the path and click Remove Click OK to close the Configuration dialog Configuring Font Paths Measurement Font Paths are the directory paths for fonts required by 2D 3D EDA or PDF files TASK 1 From the Category tree expand General and then select Font Paths 2 Click Add STEP RESULT The Add Path dialog appears 3 Enter the directory path or scroll to locate the directory where the external font files are located ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To browse all subdirectories below the current path type two asterisks at the end of the file path For example C samples will result in browsing all subdirectories below samples To browse one subdirectory below the current path type one asterisk at the end of the file path For example C samples will result in browsing one subdirectory below samples 4 Click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To add more than one path to the list repeat steps 3 to 5 STEP RESULT The directory path appears 5 Tochange the order select the path you want to move then click Up or Down to move the path to where you want it in the list 6 To remove a path select the path and click Remove STEP RESULT The selected path disappears from the list 7 Click OK to close the Configuration dialog The Measurement options let you define the default measurement units and the number of decimal places ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 176
305. ther measurement 10 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Measuring Cumulative Distance Use the Cumulative Distance option to measure the distance along a path of multi faceted adjoining points TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Distance ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring 3 To select all snapping modes click All On To deselect all snapping modes click All Off 4 Fromthe Measured Distance Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance 5 Select Cumulative 6 Click the first entity to define the starting point 243 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES 7 Continue clicking points along the path that you want to measure STEP RESULT Each point is joined by a line 8 Right click to complete the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement STEP RESULT The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measured distance Delta X Delta Y and the Manhattan Distance appear in the Measurement Entities dialog 9 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Calibrating Distance Calibrate
306. there is no entity of that type for that layer ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 76 WORKING WITH EDA FILES LAYERS Modifying Visibility for Logical Layers Use the Layers dialog to hide or display specific logical layers in the workspace TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Layers STEP RESULT The Layers dialog opens 2 Ifthe Logical Layers section is not open click Expand 3 In the Logical Layers section you can show or hide the following Option Description Cine tegital dayer Select the check box in the Visibility column Gdl Multiple logical To select more than one layer press the Shift or Control key while layers selecting and then click Visibility el 4 Click Apply to view the changes in the workspace 5 You can now save your changes as a user defined layer set 6 Click Close to close the Layers dialog 77 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES LAYERS Modifying Polarity From the Logical Layers section of the Layers dialog you can invert the polarity of the selected layer if polarity exists in the selected file TASK 1 Select the layer and then click the Polarity icon to toggle the polarity or select deselect the checkbox in the Polarity column When positive polarity is selected the layer appears as is When ne
307. to Format list select the format you want to convert the file to ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Output and Convert area options change according to the type of formatyou choose 4 Select the output and convert options that you want to set for the file Click OK RESULT The Conversion in Progress dialog appears The dialog disappears when the file is converted successfully With AutoVue it is possible to convert Office 2D and EDA formats to PDF When converted from Markup Mode markups are added to the contents of the base PDF file When you open the PDF you will see the base file along with all markups Three factors affect the resolution of an image the type of image you are scan ning the output device and the acceptable file size High resolution scans often require large files causing longer processing and print time Note that a high resolution may not produce a better quality printed image if your output device does not recognize the higher resolution information stored in the file To keep file sizes manageable select the lowest resolution that provides accept able quality on your output device With some file types the Size option appears giving you a choice between milli meters and inches Page sizes can be selected from the Size list or you can customize page sizes by configuring the Initialization file For more informa tion refer to the Installation and Configuration Guide ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 298
308. to create and save your own views AutoVue allows you to define a view and add it to the User Defined Views You can define a customized view in View or Markup mode Any views you apply to displayed models during Markup mode are saved as part of the Markup file TASK 1 Apply your own views or transformation to the displayed model ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The view states that you can apply and save for your defined view are Extents Rotation Model Transformation Explosion Render Modes Color Transparency Visibility Sectioning Camera Settings and views involving Mockups 2 From the View menu select Views select User Defined Views and then select Add View ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click in the workspace and select Views then selectUser Defined Views and then select Add View STEP RESULT The Add User Defined View dialog appears ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 126 WORKING WITH 3D FILES 3D Views 3 Enter a view name for the view that you want to define 4 Click OK to close the Add User Defined View dialog RESULT To see the view you defined click the Views tab and select it from the User Defined Views tree or select Views select User Defined Views NOTE You can also alternate between User Defined Views and Standard Views without affecting your personalized views Deleting a User Defined View TASK 1 Under the User Defined Views tree select the view that you want to delet
309. to measure the distance between model parts Snapping modes are disabled Select Geometry if you want to measure the distance between entity types Snapping modes are displayed ADDITIONAL INFORMATION See 3D Snapping Modes for more information ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 260 MARKUPS 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS 4 Ifyou selected Entity select a part or parts on the model If you selected Geometry select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To reset a set click Clear To clear items from a set select the items and press the Delete key To deselect a part or entity type on the model press the Control key and left click the part or entity type STEP RESULT The model parts appear in the list under Set 1 and are highlighted on the model and in the Model Tree All entities of the selected entity type are highlighted on the model Click bad Set 2 6 Repeat step 3 and 4 STEP RESULT The model part appears in the list under Set 2 7 From the Measured Min Distance Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance 8 Click Compute STEP RESULT The minimum distance from the first set of entities to the second set is highlighted by a line The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The X Y and Z coordinates for Position 1 and X Y and Z coordinates for Position 2 appear in the Measurement Ent
310. tree Customizing Selections Configure how you want selected components to be highlighted From the Configuration tree select EDA There are two selection options Highlight Entity and Dim Unselected Highlight Entity Activate this option to highlight all entities that you select This option is enabled by default NOTE The default highlight color is yellow See also Modifying Colors ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 186 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR EDA FILES Dim Unselected Activate this option to dim all the entities that are not selected Selected entities retain their original entity color From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Dim Unselected amp When you select Dim Unselected you can set the dimness level for entities that are not selected Drag the slider to the right to increase the dimness level and to the left to decrease the dimness level The icon to the right of the dimness settings in theConfiguration dialog lets you preview the dimness level Additionally with Dim Unselected you can select the Thicken Highlighted Entity check box This option makes the selected entity appear more pronounced Deselect the check box to return the entity to its default thickness Displaying Tooltips When you hover the mouse over an entity a tooltip appears to show you infor mation about the entity You can disable or enable these tooltips When the option is selected AutoVue automatically
311. ts or measure cumulative distance 2 From the Distance tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Distance Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance 101 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES MEASURING IN EDA FILES 3 From the Units list select the unit to which you want to calibrate the distance 4 Select Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance to a value 5 Select Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance by a factor 6 Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration result appears in the Measurement dialog 7 Click Close to close the Distance tab Measuring Minimum Distance Use the Minimum Distance option to measure the minimum distance between two nets TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure oe INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure load STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 2 Click the Min Distance tab 3 To measure the minimum distance between entities that are not on the same physical layer select Across Layers ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If a physical layer does not exist this option deter mines whether or not the minimum distance should be calculated across logical layers 4 Select First Set to select the entities that you want to measure from Select the snapping modes that you want to select as the entities for the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you clic
312. ts you view all the physical layers and associated logical layers of the EDA drawing you can view all layer sets for that file or create your own Additionally from the Layers option you can manipu late certain layer attributes such as visibility color polarity and ordering To 73 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES LAYERS display the Layers dialog from the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Layers NOTE For drawings that do not contain layers the Layers menu option and button are disabled The Layers dialog has a Physical Layers section and a Logical Layers section You can display and hide these sections by clicking Expand and Collapse respectively Physical and Logical Layers Sections The Logical Layers section displays the layers in the order they display in the workspace The Physical Layers section displays the layers in the order they appear in the layer stackup when manufactured The Physical Layers section displays a matrix with a mapping of physical layer names to entity types Each row in the matrix corresponds to a physical layer in the board Each column in the matrix lets you control the visibility of an entity type such as pin via or trace The entity types that display depend on the enti ties available in the open file Select a physical layer to change its visibility layer order and color Sel
313. ty You can choose to show or hide selected parts this can be done from either the Model Tree or the workspace From the Model Tree deselect the check box beside the model part or parts that you want to hide Conversely select the check box beside the model parts that you want to set visible RESULT The selected model parts appear or disappear from the model ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 120 WORKING WITH 3D FILES DISPLAY ATTRIBUTES NOTE You can also hide model parts by selecting them on the model or from the Model Tree then right clicking and selecting Hide Part Selecting Hide Rest displays the selected model parts and hides the rest of the model Changing Model Color You can change the color of a specific model part or selected model parts TASK 1 Select the model or model parts whose color you want to change ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If no part is selected the change is applied to the entire model 2 From the Manipulate menu select Visual Effects and then select Color ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Color STEP RESULT The Color dialog appears Select the desired color 4 Click Apply RESULT The selected part or parts change to the selected color NOTE To set the model color to its default color repeat steps 1 to 2 and click Reset in the Color dialog Adjusting the Transparency You can adjust the degree of transparency of a model This functio
314. urement dialog Distance in Vector Files Use the Distance option to measure the distance between two specific points TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure er Tonal INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears displaying the measurement options 2 Click the Distance tab Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring 4 To select all snapping modes click All On To clear all snapping modes click All Off 5 From the Measured Distance Units list select the units of measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you want to measure the distance along a path select Cumulative 6 Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point Click another point on the drawing to define the end point ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you selected Cumulative continue clicking points along the path that you want to measure 8 Right click to complete the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement STEP RESULT The points are joined by a line The Measured Distance Delta X and Delta Y appear in the Measurement dialog 9 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 52 WORKING WITH 2D FILES MEASURING IN 2D FILES Calibrating Distance Calibrate the distance measurement TASK 1 Measure distance between two points or measure cumulative distance 2 From the
315. w version and build information for components click Version Info 3 To export the version information click Export STEP RESULT The Export dialog appears 4 Navigate and select the directory to which you want to export the list Enter a file name the default name is fverinfo txt 6 Click Save STEP RESULT The list is exported to the specified file ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 16 AUTOVUE BASICS AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE 7 When you are finished viewing the file version information click Close 8 Click OK to exit the About dialog AutoVue Graphical User Interface This section introduces you to the basics of working with AutoVue s graphical user interface GUI The following image displays the AutoVue GUI for a 3D drawing Eas a Model Layout a Oe N 4 a amp 2 ws za Markup Entity Author Last Modified A Page Layer I Untitled2 lt M gt Models Views Bookmarks AutoCad3D dw AutoCAD 2004 2006 118 pg 3 3 146220 bytes 2005 07 06 NOTE This is the default view of AutoVue If you are using a customized AutoVue GUI file the menu items and toolbars may vary 17 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL AUTOVUE Basics AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE Menu Bar The menu bar is the main access to all the menu commands The selection of commands changes according to the tasks being accomplished by AutoVue Toolbars AutoVue has three toolbars
316. wing and measure its radius center and diameter TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Arc ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Arc R i STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the arc between three points Snapping modes are displayed 3 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select all snapping modes click All On To deselect all snapping modes click All Off 4 Select Arc Entity if you want to measure a predefined arc From the Arc Info list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance of the arc 6 From the Measured Angle Units list select the unitin which you want to measure the angle Select Add Radius if you want measure the radius Select Add Diameter if you want to measure the diameter If you selected From 3 Points click three points to define the arc STEP RESULT The points are joined by an arc 10 If you selected an Arc Entity click an edge of the arc STEP RESULT The arc is highlighted 11 Click to complete the measurement STEP RESULT The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measurements for center point coordinates radius diameter arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Measurement Entities d
317. wn arrow Click and drag up down or roll Move forward backward the mouse wheel forward and backward Left arrow Right arrow Click and drag left right Turn left right Alt Up arrow Alt Alt drag up down Move up down Elevation Down arrow or Mouse middle button click and drag up down Alt Left arrow Alt Alt drag left right Side step left right Right arrow or Mouse middle button click and drag left right Ctrl Up arrow Ctrl Ctrl click and drag up down Look up down Down arrow Ctrl Left arrow Ctrl Ctrl click and drag left right Rotate Right arrow Alt double click Places camera perpendicular to selected plane ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 170 WORKING WITH 3D FILES WALKTHROUGH Adding Markups in Walkthrough Mode When walking through a 3D model you can add a Note markup entity NOTE The Note markup entity is the only markup supported in Walkthrough mode TASK 1 From the Markup menu select New ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click New Markup STEP RESULT AutoVue enters Markup mode Create a Note markup entity See Adding a Note for more information on how to create Note markup entities ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can continue walking through the model while creating new Note markup entities Save your new markups See Saving a New Markup File for more infor mation STEP
318. xternal Select to display external references XRefs automatically References Clear to keep external references from displaying automatically Choose how you want the raster file to display Select Full Resolution to display raster files at full resolution Select Fit to Window to display raster files to fit the current window When Enable Look Ahead is selected and you zoom into a part of a file AutoVue renders adjacent tiles The advantage to this is improvement in perfor mance when zooming in on parts of a file The disadvantage is that if the client machine is idle for at least one second Enable Look Ahead is triggered which could slow down current operations However once all tiles are rendered all zoom operations speed up again If Enable Look Ahead is deselected AutoVue renders the tiles when requested that is only when you zoom in on parts of the file If Resolve Local Resources is selected and AutoVue tries to locate XREFs on the client side using client path settings If not found on the client side ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 174 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE GENERAL OPTIONS AutoVue will attempt to retrieve the XREFs on the server If Resolve Local Resources is unchecked AutoVue attempts to resolve the XRefs on the server side only Configuring Paths Configure the paths for XRefs and fonts These path settings are read only if Resolve Local Resources is checked When working with files that need exte
319. y press Shift while making your selection Click OK STEP RESULT Eachfile you select appears in anew window A dialog appears for each new window which lets you change the view or page for each file Each dialog has the Automatic option selected by default When the Automatic option is selected for each dialog you see different behavior depending on the files you cross probe If you cross probe a schematic and PCB one window automatically displays a 2D PCB and the other window displays a schematic The same is true if either file contains a PCB and a schematic Whereas if files A and B contain both a schematic and a PCB and they are cross probed one of the files displays the schematic page and the other displays the 2D PCB If you cross probe two PCBs one window automatically displays a 2D PCB and the other window displays a 3D PCB If you cross probe two schematics both are set to schematic To change the view of a file in a window do the following a Deselect the Automatic option in the dialog for the window you want to change b From the Type list select Schematic PCB or PCB 3D View These options are available in the Type list only when the views are present in the file STEP RESULT The view of the file changes in the window ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 84 WORKING WITH EDA FILES CROSS PROBING 10 Toswitch between multiple occurrences of a selected component do the following a From the Navigation
320. y at that point in time When the option is deselected AutoVue requests data in 10 chunks until it reaches full resolution for the file You would see the model initially at coarse resolution but continuously refining Dynamic Load Mesh Resolution Control the initial resolution with the Dynamic Load Mesh Resolution slider When you select Dynamic Loader you can control the initial resolution by setting the Dynamic Load Mesh Resolution When you set the Dynamic Load Mesh Resolution to High the file displays at a higher resolution when you zoom resulting in a smoother look For more information refer to the Installation and Configuration Guide With the Initial Visibility options you can specify the visibility of model parts when first opening a 3D file Option Description Default Visibility Load model with default visibility options All Visible Force all parts ON in the display All Invisible Force all parts OFF in the display To display model parts select the part s from the Model Tree 181 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 3D FILES PMI Initial Visibility PMI Filtering With the PMI Initial Visibility option you have the option to set a threshold for the number of PMIs to display for large models To do select the Don t display PMI for large models check box and then enter the number of PMIs to display in the PMI Threshold field From the tre
321. ype of component and a number that is specific to that component Routing Placing conductive interconnects between components on a PCB layout The process of turning nets into tracks Schematic A graphical description of an electrical circuit Segment The partial track that exists between two adjacent vertices or between a vertex and a pin Sometimes the track between two pins is also called a segment although connection is usually the more appropriate term here Signal An electrical impulse of a predetermined voltage current polarity and pulse width Silkscreen Text or outlines in ink on the solder mask on the top and sometimes on the bottom of board modules A silkscreen is used for component and identification placement on a PCB and usually includes component outlines reference designators polarity indicators pin one markings part numbers the company name and copyright info ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 306 APPENDIX A EDA TERMS AND DEFINITIONS EDA Term SMT Surface Mount Technology Definition PCB technology whereby the leads on the chips and components are soldered onto the surface of the board rather than inserted into it The use of SMT results in smaller and faster printed circuit boards Solder mask A negative plot of pads with a guard band around the pads Also a lacquer applied to prevent solder from adhering to unwanted areas on the

User`s Manual - Oracle Documentation

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents